User Guide Tinn R Team

User_guide

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 311 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

TINN-R
EDITOR - GUI FOR RLANGUAGE AND
ENVIRONMENT
FARIA, JOSÉ CLÁUDIO
GROSJEAN, PHILIPPE
JELIHOVSCHI, ENIO GALINKIN
PIETROBON, RICARDO
FARIAS, PHILIPE SILVA
KRAMER, PHILIPHE ALEXANDRE RIBEIRO
LIMA, SWAMI DE PAULA
TINN-R TEAM
DEDICATION
This user guide is dedicated to all those who
have assisted us with the Tinn-R project,
either by sending suggestions or
by contributing to its development.
CONTENTS
DEDICATION III
CONTENTS IV
LIST OF FIGURES IX
LIST OF TABLES XI
1 OVERVIEW 1
1.1 Quick start ................................... 2
1.2 What is Tinn-R? ............................... 2
1.3 Why Tinn-R? ................................. 3
1.4 What do you get by using Tinn-R? ................... 4
1.5 Do I have to pay for Tinn-R? ...................... 6
1.6
What was the motivation to start and maintain the Tinn-R
project? ..................................... 6
1.7
What is the sentence that we, from the development team,
most like to hear? .............................. 6
1.8 Acknowledgment .............................. 6
1.9 Feedback, suggestions and bug reports ............... 6
1.10 What tools were used to make this guide? .............. 7
2 BASICS 9
2.1 Configuration ................................ 10
Uninstall Tinn-R .............................. 10
Install and configure Tinn-R and R ................. 10
Rgui ........................................ 14
Rterm ....................................... 14
Rterm interface and debug package ................ 15
Speller installation ............................. 15
Inverse DVI search ............................. 15
Ruby and Deplate .............................. 17
Pandoc ..................................... 18
iv
CONTENTS V
Python and Txt2tags ........................... 19
2.2 Keyboard shortcuts (default) ....................... 21
Main menu (systematically) ...................... 25
Call Tip ..................................... 28
Code (or data) Completion ....................... 28
R Explorer ................................... 28
Alphabetical List of Keyboard Shortcuts ............. 28
2.3 FAQ ........................................ 33
What is Tinn-R? ............................... 33
Feedback, suggestions and bug report ............... 33
Tinn-R installation ............................. 33
Hotkeys (operational system) ..................... 40
Miscellaneous ................................. 41
3 WORKING WITH 47
3.1 Application options ............................ 48
Main ....................................... 48
Editor ...................................... 49
R.......................................... 53
Processing ................................... 53
3.2 Selection mode ................................ 56
Normal ..................................... 56
Line ......................................... 57
Column ...................................... 57
3.3 Highlighters (settings) ........................... 59
3.4 Shortcuts customization .......................... 61
3.5 Hotkeys (operational system) ...................... 62
3.6 Rterm interface ................................ 64
IO ......................................... 65
LOG ........................................ 67
3.7 Tools interface ................................ 68
Misc ....................................... 68
Markup ..................................... 70
Results ...................................... 71
Spell ....................................... 72
Database .................................... 73
R........................................... 77
3.8 File tabs ...................................... 81
3.9 Tools bar .................................... 82
Show/Hide .................................. 82
Disposition .................................. 82
3.10 Find and replace ............................... 84
Find ........................................ 84
Replace (Replace dialog only) ...................... 84
VI CONTENTS
3.11 Search in files ................................. 86
Options ..................................... 86
Where ...................................... 86
Directory options .............................. 86
Results interface ............................... 87
3.12 Databases ................................... 88
Shortcuts .................................... 88
Completion .................................. 88
Comments ................................... 89
Card (R) ..................................... 90
Mirrors (R) .................................... 91
3.13 Regular expressions ............................ 93
What are regular expressions? ..................... 93
Simple Matches ............................... 93
Escape Sequences ............................. 93
Character Classes ............................... 94
Metacharacters ............................... 95
Regular Expression Tutorials ...................... 99
4 MENU DESCRIPTION 101
4.1 File ........................................ 102
Template .................................... 102
Copy full path to clipboard ....................... 103
4.2 Project .......................................104
Project .......................................104
Group(s) .................................... 105
File(s) ...................................... 105
4.3 Edit ........................................ 106
Copy formatted (to export) ....................... 106
4.4 Format ......................................107
Selection .....................................107
Word ........................................107
Encoding .................................... 108
EOL (line ending) .............................. 108
UTF-8 (special case) ............................ 109
4.5 Marks ...................................... 110
Block ....................................... 110
4.6 Insert ........................................111
R (assignment) .................................111
Latex ........................................111
4.7 Search ...................................... 115
4.8 Options ..................................... 116
Syntax (highlighter) ............................ 116
Selection mode ............................... 118
CONTENTS VII
4.9 Tools ....................................... 119
Processing ................................... 119
Database .....................................124
Backup ......................................124
Restore ......................................124
Macro .......................................124
Sort ........................................ 125
4.10 R.......................................... 126
Start/close and connections ...................... 126
Rterm .......................................127
Send ........................................131
Control ..................................... 132
4.11 View ........................................134
R...........................................134
Tools ........................................137
Toolbars .................................... 139
Tabs ....................................... 139
Line wrap ................................... 140
Split ........................................141
Font of active control (not permanent) ...............141
4.12 Window ..................................... 142
4.13 Web ........................................ 143
R (search) ................................... 143
R (information) ................................144
R (Editors, Gui’s and IDEs) ........................144
Tinn-R ...................................... 145
Statistics .................................... 145
Processing ................................... 146
4.14 Help ........................................147
File conversion (introduction) .....................147
5 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE 149
5.1 Introduction ................................. 150
5.2 After installation ...............................151
5.3 Shortcuts that can make you lose the visibility of a resource . 154
5.4 I’m panicking: what do I do? ...................... 155
5.5 Application options ............................ 156
General ..................................... 156
Appearance .................................. 156
Dock ........................................157
Editor options ................................ 158
R.......................................... 159
Processing ................................... 160
5.6 Highlighters (settings) ........................... 162
VIII CONTENTS
5.7 Tools ....................................... 163
Project ...................................... 163
Database .....................................164
R.......................................... 166
5.8 Bars ........................................ 170
5.9 Spell checker ..................................171
5.10 Split ....................................... 172
5.11 Editor: how to? ................................ 173
Macros: how to use? ............................ 173
Marks: how to use? ............................. 173
Editor, Tools and Rterm: how to arrange? ..............174
Active page using the keyboard: how to change? ........174
Tab order: how to change? ........................174
Auto completion: how to use? ......................174
A WHAT IS NEW?177
A.1 Versions released in 2019 (03) ..................... 178
A.2 Versions released in 2018 (06) ..................... 180
A.3 Versions released in 2016 (01) ..................... 182
A.4 Versions released in 2015 (05) ..................... 186
A.5 Versions released in 2014 (08) ..................... 189
A.6 Versions released in 2013 (10) ..................... 192
A.7 Versions released in 2012 (03) ......................197
A.8 Versions released in 2010 (10) ..................... 200
A.9 Versions released in 2009 (16) ..................... 203
A.10 Versions released in 2008 (14) ..................... 210
A.11 Versions released in 2007 (26) ..................... 219
A.12 Versions released in 2006 (64) ......................227
A.13 Versions released in 2005 (25) ..................... 249
A.14 Versions released in 2004 (16) ..................... 265
B R MANUALS ON CRAN 273
C GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 275
INDEX 291
ABOUT THE AUTHORS 297
LIST OF FIGURES
1.1 Tinn-R screenshot. ............................... 3
3.1 Tinn-R: Main resources. ............................ 48
3.2 Main (Options/Application). ........................ 49
3.3 Editor options: Display. ............................ 50
3.4 Editor options: Advanced. .......................... 52
3.5 Editor options: encoding/EOL. ...................... 52
3.6 Editor options: keystrokes. .......................... 53
3.7 R (Options/Application). ............................ 54
3.8 R (Options/Application). ........................... 55
3.9 R (Options/Application). ........................... 55
3.10 R (Options/Application). ........................... 56
3.11 Conversion (Options/Application/Processing). ............ 57
3.12 Latex (Options/Application/Processing). ............... 58
3.13 Normal (selection mode). .......................... 58
3.14 Line (selection mode). ............................. 58
3.15 Column (selection mode). .......................... 59
3.16 Highlighter preferences. ........................... 59
3.17 Shortcuts customization. ............................ 61
3.18 Hotkeys. ....................................... 62
3.19 Rterm interface. .................................. 64
3.20 IO (Rterm interface). .............................. 66
3.21 LOG (Rterm interface). ............................. 67
3.22 Tools interface. .................................. 68
3.23 Markups (Tools). ................................. 70
3.24 Inilog (Tools/Results). .............................. 71
3.25 Search (Tools/Results). ............................ 72
3.26 Hex (Tools/Hex viewer). ........................... 73
3.27 Spelling (Tools). ................................. 73
3.28 Database (Tools). ................................. 74
3.29 R (Tools). ....................................... 77
3.30 R card (Database). ................................ 78
ix
XLIST OF FIGURES
3.31 R mirrors (Database). ............................. 79
3.32 File tabs. ........................................ 81
3.33 File tabs menu. ................................... 81
3.34 Tools bar. ...................................... 82
3.35 Tools bar menu. ................................. 83
3.36 Find and replace dialog. ............................ 84
3.37 Search in files. ................................... 86
3.38 Shortcuts (Databases). ............................. 88
3.39 Completion (Databases). ........................... 89
3.40 Comments (Databases). ........................... 89
3.41 R card (Databases). ............................... 90
3.42 R mirrors (Databases). .............................. 91
LIST OF TABLES
2.1 R interface keyboard shortcuts .................... 21
2.2 Visualization keyboard shortcuts ................... 21
2.3 Navigation keyboard shortcuts .................... 22
2.4 Search/Replace and go keyboard shortcuts ........... 22
2.5 Function keys ................................. 22
2.6 Edition keyboard shortcuts ....................... 23
2.7 Marks and go to marks keyboard shortcuts ........... 23
2.8 Project keyboard shortcuts ....................... 23
2.9 R script edition keyboard shortcuts ................. 23
2.10 Selection keyboard shortcuts ...................... 24
2.11 Compilation keyboard shortcuts ................... 24
2.12 Conversion and visualization keyboard shortcuts ....... 24
2.13 Main menu keyboard shortcuts .................... 25
2.14 File menu keyboard shortcuts ..................... 25
2.15 Project menu keyboard shortcuts .................. 25
2.16 Edit menu keyboard shortcuts ..................... 25
2.17 Format menu keyboard shortcuts .................. 26
2.18 Marks menu keyboard shortcuts ................... 26
2.19 Insert menu keyboard shortcuts ................... 26
2.20 Search menu keyboard shortcuts ................... 26
2.21 Options menu keyboard shortcuts .................. 26
2.22 Tools menu keyboard shortcuts .................... 27
2.23 R menu keyboard shortcuts ....................... 27
2.24 View menu keyboard shortcuts .................... 27
2.25 Call tip keyboard shortcuts ....................... 28
2.26 Code completion keyboard shortcuts ................ 28
2.27 R explorer keyboard shortcuts ..................... 28
2.28 ALT keyboard shortcuts .......................... 28
2.29 CTRL keyboard shortcuts ........................ 30
2.30 DEL keyboard shortcut .......................... 31
2.31 END keyboard shortcut .......................... 31
2.32 Function +keyboard shortcuts .................... 31
2.33 HOME keyboard shortcut ........................ 31
xi
XII LIST OF TABLES
2.34 SHIFT +keyboard shortcuts ...................... 32
CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW
This chapter provides a brief overview of the Tinn-R project.
1
2 OVERVIEW
1.1 QUICK START
Let’s say you don’t have time to read the full user guide just yet. That’s OK,
we know it is huge, so let’s just give you a few tips on how to get started:
•
If your version is the same or above 3.0.1.0, Tinn-R does not require
any special configuration. That is, the program is ready to be used.
One important thing to be done before using it: set a Rmirror as
close as possible to where you work. For that, first click on
CTRL +
F8
. This opens the
Tools
window, then click on
R/Mirrors
. Select
the Rmirror and push the button that shows an hourglass in the
taskbar. The chosen repository will be the new default for all actions
dependent repository (install packages, upgrade packages, etc);
•
If your version is the below the 3.0.1.0, read the basic instructions
to install and configure Rand Tinn-R:
it’s a small and easy to
follow document;
• Choose either Rgui or Rterm: it takes one mouse click;
• Open Help/Example of script.R:another mouse click;
•
Use the R toolbar to control R:
it only takes one mouse click
for each action;
• Have fun!
If you have any questions we suggest you consult this user guide.
1.2 WHAT IS TINN-R?
Tinn is a small ASCII file editor primarily intended as a better replacement
for the default Notepad running under the Windows OS. The name is the
recursive acronym: Tinn is not Notepad.
Tinn-R (Figure 1.1) is an extension of the original Tinn editor (ASCII and
UNICODE), providing additional functionality to control Rrunning as
Rgui (in SDI mode), Rterm and JGR and a whole lot of additional resources.
Tinn-R can also be thought of as feature-rich replacement of the basic
script editor provided with Rgui. It provides syntax-highlighting, code
submission as a whole or line-by-line, in addition to many other useful
tools to ease the writing and debugging of Rcode.
Both Tinn and Tinn-R are distributed under the GPL 2 license or above.
1.3. WHY TINN-R? 3
FIGURE 1.1: Tinn-R screenshot.
1.3 WHY TINN-R?
Do you:
• like the open source initiative?
• need a simple but powerful GUI/Editor for the Renvironment?
• enjoy the ability to have syntax highlighting in your source code?
•
need a tool that is simple to use but with the capabilities of a mighty
editor?
• need a tool to work with plain text files?
•
need a tool with simple commands for working with LaTeX, Sweave
and Txt2tags?
•
want to have access to the functionality of commercial and profes-
sional products?
4 OVERVIEW
If you have answered YES to any of the questions above, then Tinn-R is
a good option for you!
1.4 WHAT DO YOU GET BY USING TINN-R?
•
The ability to communicate with the Renvironment by sending
instructions, controling its processing, and receiving results:
–Rterm.exe
–Rgui.exe
–JGR
• Projects:
–
Create project files to organize your work including one level
of sub-folders and automatic file name sorting
–Easy project management in graphical and text modes
• Work with unlimited length files
•
Work on multiple documents at the same time, choosing between
multiple-document interface (MDI) and tabbed document interface
(TDI)
• Single-document window splitting
• Support to macros (volatile):
–Record
–Playback commonly used sequences
•
Search and replace not restricted to your active file, but also extend-
able to all open files, all project files, or any folder
• View file differences with color highlighting
• Syntax highlighting, which can be set by file type
• Spell checking
• Multiple undo/redo
• Highlighted color syntax with print preview
• Ability to select:
–Normal
–Column
1.4. WHAT DO YOU GET BY USING TINN-R? 5
–Lines
• Ability to bookmark:
–Line
–Block
• Line numbers
• Special characters
• Sort multiple variable types:
–String
–Data
–Number
• Count:
–Character
–Words
–Spaces
• ASCII chart
• Export with highlight to clipboard:
–RTF
–HTML
–TeX
• Matching bracket highlighting
• Conversion tools:
–Pandoc
–Deplate
–Txt2tags
• LaTeX support:
–Edition
–Compilation
–Inverse DVI search.
We are constantly on the move!
6 OVERVIEW
1.5 DOIHAVE TO PAY FOR TINN-R?
The Tinn-R Team have been developing Tinn-R project under the GPL
since june of 2003 (almost 15 years). All this time it was distributed as
free software. Currently, there are corporative alternatives (paid or free as
RStudio and RTVS) to lead with R environment. So, to cover the costs, we
are evaluating the possibility that it will be distributed as sharewere in the
near future.
1.6 WHAT WAS THE MOTIVATION TO START AND MAINTAIN THE TINN-R
PROJECT?
Motivation to start Tinn-R:
We could not find a GUI/Editor for Rrunning
in the Windows OS that would give us all the ease of use and flexi-
bility we wanted. So, we started this project using an open source
editor called Tinn as our initial platform.
Motivation to maintain Tinn-R:
The most difficult phase of the project
was getting started: choosing the editor; all the preliminary perfor-
mance and stability tests; understanding source structure; among
many other struggles. Making it to run more and more smoothly
and according to our daily needs was then a natural consequence.
This is all to say that the open source movement has substantially
changed our lives for better. We strongly believe in making software
more widely available so that more people can benefit from it. We
consider Tinn-R to be our small contribution to this fantastic open
source initiative.
1.7 WHAT IS THE SENTENCE THAT WE,FROM THE DEVELOPMENT TEAM,
MOST LIKE TO HEAR?
Tinn-R made my life easier ... thanks for creating it.
1.8 ACKNOWLEDGMENT
We would like to thank those who have assisted us with the Tinn-R project,
either by sending suggestions or by contributing to its development.
1.9 FEEDBACK,SUGGESTIONS AND BUG REPORTS
Please submit feedback to José Cláudio Faria. If you submit a bug report,
please provide as much detail as possible. This includes indicating the
Tinn-R version, your operating system (Windows XP, Windows 7, etc) and
language (English, French, Portuguese). If the bug is related to an interface
1.10. WHAT TOOLS WERE USED TO MAKE THIS GUIDE? 7
with R, please also indicate which version of Ryou are using, as well as
whether you are running Rterm or Rgui. Ideally,please also add the content
of the Tools/Results/Ini log interface since this will help us address the
issue more promptly.
1.10 WHAT TOOLS WERE USED TO MAKE THIS GUIDE?
It were used mainly:
1. Tinn-R to edit and manager (as project) the L
A
T
EX source files;
2.
T
E
Xstudio was also used in some parts where, to improve the pro-
ductivity, it was necessary a more specialized L
A
T
EX editor;
3.
Vim and L
A
T
E
XBox plugin when working under Linux/Debian (the
actual preferred OS of the Tinn-R project coordinator);
4. WinSnap to get all images from the application;
5. FastStone Image Viewer to browser and manager images;
6. Ras interpreter;
7. MikT
EXto compile the L
A
T
EX source files to final PDF format;
8. SumatraPDF and Foxit Reader as PDF viewers.
CHAPTER 2
BASICS
This chapter provides the basics about the Tinn-R project.
9
10 BASICS
2.1 CONFIGURATION
This section provides information on Tinn-R configuration and associated
applications.
Uninstall Tinn-R
•ALWAYS UNISTALL ANY PRIOR VERSION OF Tinn-R BEFORE IN-
STALLING A NEW ONE! Tinn-R has its own uninstall option.
•
The folder where Tinn-R project stores the ini files will not be re-
moved when unistalling it. Why? Because whenever you install a
different version all your preferences will be preserved.
•
You can check where these files are located by checking Help/Ini
files (path information). If you prefer, you may delete these settings
by removing the entire folder manually.
All your preferences will
be lost forever if you don’t have a backup file.
Install and configure Tinn-R and R
R basic configuration:
•
Starting from version 1.18.X.X,
Tinn-R requires
R
to run in SDI
mode
. So, Tinn-R is not compatible neither with Rgui in MDI mode
(only SDI) nor with S-PLUS. The latest compatible version was the
historic 1.17.2.4.
•
Starting from version 2.0.0.0,
Tinn-R requires
R
to run either
Rterm or Rgui in SDI mode
. There are four alternatives you can
choose from: Rterm, Rgui in SDI mode or JGR.
•
You have three basic options in order to switch Rgui from MDI to
SDI:
1.
In Rgui,select
Edit/GUI preferences...
, set SDI and click on
Save
, then
OK
without changing the name of the proposed file.
Then, click
OK
or
Cancel
in the
Rgui Configuration Editor
(ignore any eventual messages), and restart Rgui (changes will
not be taken into account in the current session).
2. Manually edit the file Rconsole:
## Style
# This can be yes (for MDI) or no (for SDI).
MDI = no
2.1. CONFIGURATION 11
3.
Create a shortcut to Ron your desktop (or anywhere that is con-
venient),and type in the switch
-sdi
after the
...\Rgui.exe
in
the
Target
box. To do this, right click on your shortcut, select
Properties and navigate to the Shortcut tab.
If you have any version of Tinn-R (>=3.0.1.0) installed:
If your version is the same or above 3.0.1.0, Tinn-R does not require any
special configuration. That is, the program is ready to be used. One impor-
tant thing to be done before using it: set a Rmirror as close as possible to
where you work. For that, first click on
CTRL + F8
. This opens the
Tools
window, then click on
R/Mirrors
. Select the Rmirror and push the but-
ton that shows an hourglass in the taskbar. The chosen repository will
be the new default for all actions dependent repository (install packages,
upgrade packages, etc).
If you have any version of Tinn-R (<=2.2.0.2) installed:
1. Uninstall previous versions of Tinn-R
2.
Edit the file Rprofile.site (folder etc where Ris installed) and com-
ment (or remove) all prior configuration scripts RELATED TO TINN-
R
3. Start R
4. Install the following packages:
a) TinnR
b) svSocket
c) formatR
5. Close R
6. Install the new version of Tinn-R
7. Start Tinn-R
8.
From the Tinn-R main menu, choose the option
R/Configure/Per-
manent (Rprofile.site)
. It will write the following text to the file
Rprofile.site:
##===============================================================
## Tinn-R: necessary packages and functions
## Tinn-R: >= 2.4.1.1 with TinnR package >= 1.0.3
##===============================================================
## Set the URL of the preferred repository, below some examples:
options(repos='http://cran.at.r-project.org/') # Austria/Wien
#options(repos='http://cran-r.c3sl.ufpr.br/') # Brazil/PR
12 BASICS
#options(repos='http://cran.fiocruz.br/') # Brazil/RJ
#options(repos='http://www.vps.fmvz.usp.br/CRAN/') # Brazil/SP
#options(repos='http://brieger.esalq.usp.br/CRAN/') # Brazil/SP
library(utils)
## Check necessary packages
necessary <- c('TinnR',
'svSocket',
'formatR')
installed <- necessary %in% installed.packages()[, 'Package']
if (length(necessary[!installed]) >=1)
install.packages(necessary[!installed])
## Load packages
library(TinnR)
library(svSocket)
## Uncomment the two lines below if you want Tinn-R to always start R at start-up
## (Observation: check the path of Tinn-R.exe)
#options(IDE='C:/Tinn-R/bin/Tinn-R.exe')
#trStartIDE()
## Option
options(use.DDE=T)
## Start DDE
trDDEInstall()
## Short paths
.trPaths <- paste(paste(Sys.getenv('APPDATA'),
'\\Tinn-R\\tmp\\',
sep=''),
c('',
'search.txt',
'objects.txt',
'file.r',
'selection.r',
'block.r',
'lines.r',
'reformat-input.r',
'reformat-output.r'),
sep='')
9. Start Rgui or Rterm from within Tinn-R
10. Read the content from the links below:
•
Card: to know the shortcuts related with Rterm and all others
•What is new: to know the news.
2.1. CONFIGURATION 13
Information about how to customize the
Rprofile.site
file can be ob-
tained from Initialization at Start of an R Session and an example of this
file from SourceForge.
If you have any version of Tinn-R (>=2.2.0.2) installed and configured:
1. Uninstall the prior version of Tinn-R 2.X.X.X
2. Install the new version of Tinn-R
3. Run it.
If you want to install any old version of Tinn-R (<=2.0.0.0"):
•Downgrading
:
rename (or delete) the folder where Tinn-R stores
the ini files
. The uninstall is necessary since Tinn-R does not
downgrade automatically. If you encounter any problems while
downgrading, check the ini folder and respective files.
• Download and install Tinn-R.
•
Install the
SciViews
bundle, then type
guiDDEInstall()
in Rand
that’s all!
> install.packages('SciViews', dep=T)
> guiDDEInstall()
•
Perhaps the best way to get Rto communicate with Tinn-R from the
time it is started is to add the following commands to
../etc/Rpro-
file.site in the Rinstall directory:
#===============================================================
# Tinn-R: necessary packages and functions
#===============================================================
library(utils)
necessary = c('svIDE','svIO','svSocket','R2HTML')
installed = necessary %in% installed.packages()[, 'Package']
if (length(necessary[!installed]) >=1)
install.packages(necessary[!installed], dep = T)
library(svIDE)
library(svIO)
library(svSocket)
library(R2HTML)
guiDDEInstall()
14 BASICS
•
If you chose the latter option
.../etc/Rprofile.site
, a nice ad-
ditional functionality is provided by adding the two lines below
BEFORE the library(svIDE) command:
options(IDE = 'C:/Tinn-R/bin/Tinn-R.exe')
options(use.DDE = T)
The first line tells Rthat you want to use Tinn-R as your IDE (In-
tegrated Development Environment). To make this happen, you
should change the path that leads to where
Tinn-R.exe
is installed
if it happens to be different from the default configuration. The
second line indicates that you want to start the DDE server auto-
matically.
By doing this, Tinn-R will start automatically once you invoke R.
Rgui
•
Tinn-R has an icon within the Options toolbar containing the hint
Options: return focus to editor after send/control Rgui
which
enables the user to configure the focus control. When checked:
–
If the editor has the focus: it will
go back
to the editor after
any send to or R control action;
–Otherwise, the focus will be set to the Rgui interface.
Rterm
•
The above-mentioned icon will be disabled with Rterm interface.
The following will then happen:
–
If the focus is placed on the editor it will
go back
to the editor
after any send to or R control action;
–
If the focus is placed on the Rterm (IO or LOG), it will be
main-
tened in this interface (IO);
–
Situations above are also the case when working with two mon-
itors.
2.1. CONFIGURATION 15
Rterm interface and debug package
•
Several changes were made to the debug package (1.0.2) regarding
the messaging system (stdout and stderr). The default option is no
longer compatible with Rterm interface implementation.
•
The best way to make it compatible again is to add the option below
to the Rprofile.site file:
options(debug.catfile = 'stdout')
•
This option is automatically sent to the Rinterpreter from version
3.0.3.0 of Tinn-R project.
Speller installation
• To install this resource:
1. Close Tinn-R (if it is running);
2. Download the dictionaries you would like to add to Tinn-R;
3. Install the file (for example ISpEnFrGe.exe);
•
Upon start,Tinn-R will recognize allinstalled dictionaries. You should
choose one as your default.
•
Before installing new dictionaries, it is strongly recommended that
you close Tinn-R.
•
Another useful tool is the
UserDicEditor
which enables the editing
of dictionaries.
Inverse DVI search
•
Tinn-R is able to perform
inverse DVI search
. To get this func-
tion to work, include in your DVI previewer the path of the binary
executable file for Tinn-R along with the parameters for file and line.
For example, using YAP under Miktex, the configuration would be
(assuming a default path for Tinn-R):
C:\Tinn-R\bin\Tinn-R.exe "%f;%l"
–
Please make sure that there is no space between the parame-
ters %f(related to file) and %l(related to line);
16 BASICS
–
It is necessary to add the parameter for Miktex compilation
within Tinn-R (Options/Application/Processing/Latex/DVI):
latex -c-style-errors -src-specials;
–
Tinn-R can do all of this automatically by setting the option
Restore default:
latex -c-style-errors --src-specials
and
bibtex --src-specials
2.1. CONFIGURATION 17
Ruby and Deplate
•
Deplate (user guide here) is a remote Ruby based tool for converting
documents written in wiki-like markup to LaTeX, HTML, HTML
slides, or DocBook format. Deplate supports page templates, em-
bedded LaTeX code, footnotes, citations, bibliographies, automatic
generation of indices, tables of contents, among others. Deplate
can also be used to create Web pages and, via LaTeX or DocBook,
high-quality printouts.
•
Tinn-R works with the Ruby interpreter for Windows (ruby.exe) and
Ruby scripts to generate file conversation within deplate.
• To install and configure these resources follow these steps:
1.
Download and unzip the Ruby interpreter anywhere in your
computer;
2. Download and unzip Deplate anywhere in your computer;
3.
Within Tinn-R, go to
Options/Application/Processing/Con-
version/Deplate
and add information on parameters (
-f
is
the default), the interpreter path (
ruby.exe
), and the converter
(deplate.rb ruby script);
The conversion options using
Deplate
depends of the file extension. Are
recognized: .dp, .dpt, .dplt, .deplate and .txt.
18 BASICS
We recently observed a problem when converting files with file names
with an underscore. For example
deplate_intro.dplt
. In these cases
the file conversion is completed, but Tinn-R won’t open the file since it
can’t find it. This pattern is caused by Deplate (a ruby script) generating a
file named
deplate__intro.html
.Observe that this file name contains a
double underscore. In sum, for the time being, avoid underscores in file
names when you intend to convert them later through Deplate.
Pandoc
•
If you need to convert files from one markup format into another,
Pandoc is your swiss-army knife.
• To install and configure Pandoc resources, just follow these steps:
1.
Download and install the converter Pandoc anywhere in your
computer;
2.
Within Tinn-R, go to
Options/Application/Processing/Con-
version/Pandoc and add information on path (pandoc.exe).
• Pandoc can convert documents:
2.1. CONFIGURATION 19
From
DocBook
HTML
JSON version of native AST
LaTeX
markdown
native Haskell
reStructuredText
textile
To Subset(s)
Documentation formats DocBook, GNU TexInfo, Groff man pages
Ebooks EPUB
HTML formats
XHTML, HTML5, and HTML slide shows using Slidy,
Slideous, S5, or DZSlides
Lightweight markup formats
Markdown, reStructuredText, AsciiDoc, MediaWiki
markup, Emacs Org-Mode, Textile
PDF via LaTeX
TeX formats LaTeX, ConTeXt, LaTeX Beamer slides
Word processor formats
Microsoft Word docx, OpenOffice/LibreOffice ODT,
OpenDocument XML
Python and Txt2tags
•
Txt2tags (user guide here) converts a text file with
minimal and
human readable markup
to: HTML, XHTML, SGML, LaTeX, Lout,
UNIX man page, Wikipedia, Google Code Wiki, DokuWiki, Moin-
Moin, MagicPoint (mgp), and PageMaker. It is simple and fast, fea-
20 BASICS
turing automatic TOC, macros, filters, include, tools, GUI, CLI, Web
interfaces, translations, and extensive documentation.
•
Tinn-R works with the Phyton interpreter for Windows (python.exe),
using Python scripts to make the conversion (txt2tags).
• To install and configure Python resources, just follow these steps:
1.
Download and install the Python interpreter anywhere in your
computer;
2. Download and unzip Txt2tags anywhere in your computer;
3.
Within Tinn-R, go to
Options/Application/Processing/Txt2tags
and add information on parameters (
-t
is the default), inter-
preterpath (
python.exe
) and the converter(
txt2tags python
script);
The conversion options using
Txt2tags
depends of the file extension. Are
recognized: .t2, .t2t, .txt2tags. and .txt.
2.2. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS (DEFAULT) 21
2.2 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS (DEFAULT)
This section provides information about keyboard shortcuts.
R interface:
LISTING 2.1: R INTERFACE KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
ALT + DOWN : R history: down (IO)
ALT + E : R echo (on/off)
ALT + L : Clear (LOG)
ALT + LEFT : Editor: set focus
ALT + PGDN : LOG: set focus
ALT + RIGHT : IO: set focus
ALT + UP : R history: up (IO)
CTRL + - : Insert <-
CTRL + + : Insert ->
CTRL + ENTER : Send any prior line (IO)
CTRL + F1 : Example on selected word*
CTRL + F2 : Open example on selected word*
CTRL + L : Clear (IO)
CTRL + SPACE : Tip after '('and completion after '$'
CTRL + TAB : Change seq. IO and LOG to the right**
CTRL + TIL : Send current file to Sweave
SHIFT + CTRL + TAB : Change seq. IO and LOG to the left**
F1 : Help on selected word*
SHIFT + CTRL + B : Clear (IO and LOG)
SHIFT + CTRL + F1 : R help (HTML)*
*(requires an R session)
** (requires focus)
Visualization:
LISTING 2.2: VISUALIZATION KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + F8 : Tools: visible (show/hide)
CTRL + F9 : R interface: visible (show/hide)
CTRL + F10 : R interface: minimize
CTRL + F11 : R interface: optimize
CTRL + F12 : R interface: maximize
CTRL + ALT + G : Gutter (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + L : Line number (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + K : Special characters (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + V : Tool bars: all (show/hide)
CTRL + TAB : Change seq. the active page
(Editor, RTerm an Help) to the right*
CTRL + SHIFT + TAB : Change seq. the active page
(Editor, RTerm an Help) to the left*
SHIFT + CTRL + + : Increase font size**
SHIFT + CTRL + - : Decrease font size**
*(requires more than one)
** (text within the main interface)
22 BASICS
Navigation:
LISTING 2.3: NAVIGATION KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + END : End of a doc
CTRL + HOME : Beginning of a doc
END : End of a line
HOME : Beginning of a line
Search/Replace and Go:
LISTING 2.4: SEARCH/REPLACE AND GO KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + F : Find
F3 : Find again
SHIFT + CTRL + F : Search in files
CTRL + R : Replace
CTRL + G : Go to line
Function Keys:
LISTING 2.5: FUNCTION KEYS
F1 : Help on selected word*
F2 : List the structure of selected object*
F3 : Find again
F7 : Macro record
F8 : Macro play
F9 : Clear the R console*
F10 : Close all graphic devices*
F11 : Remove all objects*
F12 : Clear all*
*(requires an R session)
2.2. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS (DEFAULT) 23
Edition:
LISTING 2.6: EDITION KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
ALT + C : Block comment
ALT + N : Block uncomment (first ocurrence)
ALT + Z : Block uncomment (all ocurrence)
CTRL + ( : Insert (or replace) (|)
CTRL + ) : Insert (or replace) ()
CTRL + A : Select all
CTRL + C : Copy
CTRL + END : End doc
CTRL + HOME : Beginning of a doc
CTRL + I : Block indent
CTRL + T : Delete word
CTRL + U : Block unindent
CTRL + V : Paste
CTRL + X : Cut
CTRL + Y : Delete line
CTRL + Z : Undo
END : End of a line
HOME : Beginning of a line
SHIFT + CTRL + Z : Redo
Marks and Go to Marks:
LISTING 2.7: MARKS AND GO TO MARKS KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + NUMBER[0..9] : Go to mark (no numeric keypad)
SHIFT + CTRL + NUMBER[0..9] : Mark (no numeric keypad)
Project:
LISTING 2.8: PROJECT KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + INS : Add current file to selected group
SHIFT + CTRL + INS : Add file(s) to selected group (with dialog)
DEL : Delete selected group or file
R Script Edition:
LISTING 2.9: R SCRIPT EDITION KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + - : Insert <-
CTRL + - : Insert <- (numeric keypad)*
CTRL + + : Insert ->
CTRL + + : Insert -> (numeric keypad)*
CTRL + *: Insert tip (numeric keypad)*
CTRL + ENTER : Send current line to R and insert a line break
*(not configurable by user)
24 BASICS
Selection:
LISTING 2.10: SELECTION KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + ALT + S : Mark block
CTRL + ALT + Z : Unmark block
CTRL + ALT + X : Unmark all
SHIFT + CTRL + C : Selection: set to column mode
SHIFT + CTRL + L : Selection: set to line mode
SHIFT + CTRL + N : Selection: set to normal mode
Compilation:
LISTING 2.11: COMPILATION KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + ALT + D : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (single)
CTRL + ALT + P : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (single)
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + D : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (bibtex)
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + P : Compilation: LaTeX to PDF (bibtex)
CTRL + ALT + I : Compilation: Make index (makeindex)
Conversion and Visualization:
LISTING 2.12: CONVERSION AND VISUALIZATION KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
SHIFT + CTRL + H : Conversion: txt2tags to HTML
SHIFT + CTRL + P : Conversion: Pandoc*
SHIFT + CTRL + S : Conversion: txt2tags to Sweave
SHIFT + CTRL + T : Conversion: txt2tags to LaTeX
SHIFT + CTRL + O : Open current HTML files**
SHIFT + CTRL + U : Open current file (generic)
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + H : Conversion: deplate to HTML
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + S : Conversion: deplate to Sweave
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + T : Conversion: deplate to LaTeX
*(a universal document converter)
** (with system default browser)
2.2. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS (DEFAULT) 25
Main menu (systematically)
LISTING 2.13: MAIN MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
ALT + F : File
ALT + P : Project
ALT + E : Edit
ALT + A : Format
ALT + M : Marks
ALT + I : Insert
ALT + S : Search
ALT + O : Options
ALT + T : Tools
ALT + R : R
ALT + V : View
ALT + D : Window
ALT + B : Web
ALT + H : Help
File:
LISTING 2.14: FILE MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + N : New file
CTRL + O : Open file
CTRL + P : Print
CTRL + S : Save file
CTRL + W : Close file
SHIFT + CTRL + R : Reload file
SHIFT + CTRL + W : Close all files
Project:
LISTING 2.15: PROJECT KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + INS : Add current file to selected group
SHIFT + CTRL + INS : Add file(s) to selected group (with dialog)
Edit:
LISTING 2.16: EDIT MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + Z : Undo
CTRL + SHIFT + Z : Redo
CTRL + C : Copy
CTRL + X : Cut
CTRL + V : Paste
CTRL + A : Copy all
ALT + C : Block/line comment
ALT + N : Block/line uncomment first occurrence
ALT + Z : Block/line uncomment all occurrences
26 BASICS
Format:
LISTING 2.17: FORMAT MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + F5 : Reformat R (file or selection)
CTRL + I : Block indent
CTRL + U : Block unindent
Marks:
LISTING 2.18: MARKS MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + NUMBER[0..9] : Go to mark (no numeric keypad)
SHIFT + CTRL + NUMBER[0..9] : Mark (no numeric keypad)
CTRL + ALT + S : Mark block
CTRL + ALT + Z : Unmark block
CTRL + ALT + X : Unmark all
Insert:
LISTING 2.19: INSERT MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + - : Insert <-
CTRL + + : Insert ->
CTRL + J : Completion
SHIFT + CTRL + I : Insert dimensional element (LaTeX)
Search:
LISTING 2.20: SEARCH MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + F : Search text
CTRL + G : Go to
CTRL + R : Replace text
F3 : Search again
Options:
LISTING 2.21: OPTIONS MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
ALT + E : R echo (on/off)
CTRL + ALT + C : Auto completion \verb{( [ { '"}
CTRL + ALT + N : Enable notification
CTRL + ALT + U : Update silently
SHIFT + CTRL + C : Selection: set to column mode
SHIFT + CTRL + L : Selection: set to line mode
SHIFT + CTRL + N : Selection: set to normal mode
2.2. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS (DEFAULT) 27
Tools:
LISTING 2.22: TOOLSMENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
SHIFT + CTRL + Down : Sort strings
SHIFT + CTRL + H : Conversion: txt2tags to HTML
SHIFT + CTRL + P : Conversion: Pandoc*
SHIFT + CTRL + S : Conversion: txt2tags to Sweave
SHIFT + CTRL + T : Conversion: txt2tags to LaTeX
SHIFT + CTRL + O : Open current HTML files**
SHIFT + CTRL + U : Open current file (generic)
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + H : Conversion: deplate to HTML
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + S : Conversion: deplate to Sweave
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + T : Conversion: deplate to LaTeX
CTRL + ALT + D : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (single)
CTRL + ALT + P : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (single)
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + D : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (bibtex)
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + P : Compilation: LaTeX to PDF (bibtex)
CTRL + ALT + I : Compilation: Make index (makeindex)
CTRL + B : Match bracket
F7 : Macro/Record
F8 : Macro/Play
*(a universal document converter)
** (with system default browser)
R:
LISTING 2.23: R MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
ALT + L : Clear (LOG)
ALT + LEFT : Editor: set focus
ALT + PGDN : LOG: set focus
ALT + RIGHT : IO: set focus
CTRL + F10 : R interface: minimize
CTRL + F11 : R interface: optimize
CTRL + F12 : R interface: maximize
CTRL + F9 : R interface: visible (show/hide)
CTRL + L : Clear (IO)
SHIFT + CTRL + B : Clear (IO and LOG)
View:
LISTING 2.24: VIEW MENU KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
ALT + LEFT : Editor: set focus
ALT + PGDN : LOG: set focus
ALT + RIGHT : IO: set focus
ALT + W : Editor: line wrap (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + K : Special characters (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + L : Line number (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + V : Tool bars: all (show/hide)
CTRL + F10 : R interface: minimize
CTRL + F11 : R interface: optimize
CTRL + F12 : R interface: maximize
CTRL + F8 : Tools: visible (show/hide)
28 BASICS
CTRL + F9 : R interface: visible (show/hide)
Call Tip
LISTING 2.25: CALL TIP KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + SPACE : Tip after '('and completion after '$'
Code (or data) Completion
LISTING 2.26: CODE COMPLETION KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + SPACE : Tip after '('and completion after '$'
R Explorer
LISTING 2.27: R EXPLORER KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + E : Refresh R environment
SHIFT + CTRL + E : Refresh R explorer or filter
Alphabetical List of Keyboard Shortcuts
ALT +: A-Z:
LISTING 2.28: ALT KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
ALT + A : Format
ALT + B : Web
ALT + C : Block comment
ALT + D : Window
ALT + DOWN : R history: down (IO)
ALT + E : Edit
ALT + E : R echo (on/off)
ALT + F : File
ALT + H : Help
ALT + I : Insert
ALT + L : Clear (LOG)
ALT + LEFT : Editor: set focus
ALT + M : Marks
ALT + N : Block uncomment (first occurrence)
ALT + O : Options
ALT + P : Project
ALT + PGDN : LOG: set focus
ALT + R : R
ALT + RIGHT : IO: set focus
ALT + S : Search
ALT + T : Tools
ALT + UP : R history: up (IO)
ALT + V : View
ALT + W : Editor: line wrap (show/hide)
2.2. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS (DEFAULT) 29
ALT + Z : Block uncomment (all occurrence)
30 BASICS
CTRL +: A-Z, 0-9, /, ( and ):
LISTING 2.29: CTRL KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
CTRL + - : Insert <-
CTRL + - : Insert <- (numeric keypad)*
CTRL + ( : Insert (or replace) (|)
CTRL + ) : Insert (or replace) ()
CTRL + *: Insert tip (numeric keypad)
CTRL + + : Insert ->
CTRL + + : Insert -> (numeric keypad)*
CTRL + A : Select all
CTRL + ALT + C : Auto completion \verb{( [ { '"}
CTRL + ALT + D : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (single)
CTRL + ALT + G : Gutter (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + I : Compilation: Make index (makeindex)
CTRL + ALT + K : Special characters (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + L : Line number (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + N : Enable notification
CTRL + ALT + P : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (single)
CTRL + ALT + S : Mark block
CTRL + ALT + U : Update silently
CTRL + ALT + V : Tool bars: all (show/hide)
CTRL + ALT + X : Unmark all
CTRL + ALT + Z : Unmark block
CTRL + B : Match bracket
CTRL + C : Copy
CTRL + E : Refresh R environment
CTRL + END : End doc
CTRL + ENTER : Send any prior line (IO)
CTRL + ENTER : Send current line to R and insert a line break
CTRL + F : Find
CTRL + F1 : Example on selected word**
CTRL + F2 : Open example on selected word*
CTRL + F10 : R interface: minimize
CTRL + F11 : R interface: optimize
CTRL + F12 : R interface: maximize
CTRL + F5 : Reformat R (file or selection)
CTRL + F8 : Tools: visible (show/hide)
CTRL + F9 : R interface: visible (show/hide)
CTRL + G : Go to line
CTRL + HOME : Beginning doc
CTRL + I : Block indent
CTRL + INS : Add current file to selected group
CTRL + L : Clear (IO)
CTRL + N : New file
CTRL + NUMBER[0..9] : Go to mark (no numeric keypad)
CTRL + O : Open file
CTRL + P : Print
CTRL + R : Replace text
CTRL + S : Save file
CTRL + SPACE : Tip after '('and completion after '$'
CTRL + T : Delete word
CTRL + TAB : Change seq. the active page
(Editor, RTerm an Help) to the right ***
2.2. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS (DEFAULT) 31
CTRL + TIL : Send current file to Sweave
CTRL + U : Block unindent
CTRL + V : Paste
CTRL + W : Close file
CTRL + X : Cut
CTRL + Y : Delete line
CTRL + Z : Undo
*(not configurable by user)
** (requires an R session)
*** (require more than one)
DEL:
LISTING 2.30: DEL KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
DEL (Project) : Delete selected group or file
END:
LISTING 2.31: END KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
END : End line
Function +: 1-12:
LISTING 2.32: FUNCTION +KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
F1 : Help on selected word*
F2 : List structure of selected object*
F3 : Find again
F7 : Macro record
F8 : Macro play
F9 : Clear the R console*
F10 : Close all graphic devices*
F11 : Remove all objects*
F12 : Clear all*
*(requires an R session)
HOME:
LISTING 2.33: HOME KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
HOME : Beginning line
32 BASICS
SHIFT +: A-Z, 0-9 and /:
LISTING 2.34: SHIFT +KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
SHIFT + CTRL + + : Increase font size*
SHIFT + CTRL + - : Decrease font size
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + D : Compilation: LaTeX to DVI (bibtex)
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + H : Conversion: deplate to HTML
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + P : Compilation: LaTeX to PDF (bibtex)
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + S : Conversion: deplate to Sweave
SHIFT + CTRL + ALT + T : Conversion: deplate to LaTeX
SHIFT + CTRL + B : Clear (IO and LOG)
SHIFT + CTRL + C : Selection: set to column mode
SHIFT + CTRL + Down : Sort strings
SHIFT + CTRL + E : Refresh R explorer or filter
SHIFT + CTRL + F : Search in files
SHIFT + CTRL + F1 : R help (HTML)*
SHIFT + CTRL + H : Conversion: txt2tags to HTML
SHIFT + CTRL + I : Insert dimensional element (LaTeX)
SHIFT + CTRL + INS : Add file(s) to selected group (with dialog)
SHIFT + CTRL + L : Selection: set to line mode
SHIFT + CTRL + P : Conversion: Pandoc***
SHIFT + CTRL + N : Selection: set to normal mode
SHIFT + CTRL + NUMBER[0..9] : Mark (no numeric keypad)
SHIFT + CTRL + O : Open current HTML files****
SHIFT + CTRL + R : Reload file
SHIFT + CTRL + S : Conversion: txt2tags to Sweave
SHIFT + CTRL + T : Conversion: txt2tags to LaTeX
SHIFT + CTRL + TAB : Change seq. the active page
(Editor, RTerm an Help) to the left
SHIFT + CTRL + U : Open current file (generic)
SHIFT + CTRL + W : Close all files
SHIFT + CTRL + Z : Redo
*(extensive to text of the main interface)
** (requires an R session)
*** (a universal document converter)
**** (with system default browser)
2.3. FAQ 33
2.3 FAQ
This section provides information on
F
requently
A
sked
Q
uestions (FAQ).
What is Tinn-R?
•
Tinn is a small ASCII file editor primarily intended as a better re-
placement for the default Notepad running under the Windows OS.
The name is the recursive acronym: Tinn is not Notepad.
•
Tinn-R is an extension of the original Tinn editor (ASCII and UNI-
CODE), providing additional functionality to control Rrunning as
Rgui (in SDI mode), Rterm and JGR. And a whole lot of additional
resources.
•
Tinn-R can also be thought of as feature-rich replacement of the ba-
sic script editor provided with Rgui. It provides syntax-highlighting,
code submission as a whole or line-by-line, in addition to many
other useful tools to ease the writing and debugging of Rcode.
•
Both Tinn and Tinn-R are distributed under the GPL 2 license or
above.
Feedback, suggestions and bug report
Please send your feedback to José Cláudio Faria. If you submit a bug report,
please provide as much detail as possible. This includes indicating the
Tinn-R version, your operating system (Windows XP, Windows 7, etc),
and language (English, French, Portuguese). If the bug is related to an
interface with R, please also indicate which version of Ryou are using, as
well as whether you are running Rterm or Rgui. Ideally, please also add
the content of the Tools/Results/Ini log interface since this will help us
address the issue more promptly.
Tinn-R installation
See details ...
Where can I get the latest version of Tinn-R?
•
The latest version of Tinn-R can be downloaded from Web page or
SourceForge.
34 BASICS
How do I install Tinn-R?
•
Tinn-R uses a classical method of installation and runs on all ver-
sions of the Windows OS. You need administrative rights to install,
although you can install it as a regular user provided you have write
permission on the directory where you will perform the installation.
If you have problems, please contact your computer or network
administrator.
•
Note that if you install Tinn-R you will likely want to use it along
with R, and so Rmust be installed separately. Rcan be obtained
from here.
.trPaths? (a very recorrent FAQ)
If your version is the same or above 3.0.1.0, Tinn-R does not require any
special configuration. That is, the program is ready to be used. One impor-
tant thing to be done before using it: set a Rmirror as close as possible to
where you work. For that, first click on
CTRL + F8
. This opens the
Tools
window, then click on
R/Mirrors
. Select the Rmirror and push the but-
ton that shows an hourglass in the taskbar. The chosen repository will
be the new default for all actions dependent repository (install packages,
upgrade packages, etc).
If you have any version of Tinn-R (
<
=2.2.0.2) installed, you need to define
your .trPaths correctly in the file
R/etc/Rprofile.site
. With the "new"
versions of Windows (Vista, 7 e 8) write permissions are more annoying to
deal with, and you have to manually give yourself permission to write to
the file/directory, before you can change and save the files. So, to fix it, you
have to enable write access to the
Rprofile.site
file and then configure
Rto run.
• Locate your Rinstall. The default is C:\Program Files\R\R-X.X\.
•
The file you need write access to is
Rprofile.site
, located in the
folder
etc
. A good option is to give write access to all of
C:\Program
Files\R\R-X.X\.
•
Select the directory you want to give yourself permission to write in,
right click, properties, security, and then it depends on your version
of Windows. Once you’ve enabled writing and saved, you’ll need to
go back to Tinn-R. In the main menu choice:
R/Configure/Perma-
nent(Rprofile.site).
• It should autoload and fix your Rprofile.site file.
2.3. FAQ 35
•
The one additional change you would make is to either comment
out or change your default repository.
• Usefull links about:
1. Hidden (files and folders)
–Microsoft
–Carbonite
–About.com
–Computer Hope
2. Permission (files and folders)
–Microsoft
–Seven Forums
–Addictive Tips
Can I get the source code?
•
Yes. You can get and modify the source code of Tinn-R as well as
redistribute your changes as long as you respect the terms of the
GPL license. The source code is available from SourceForge.
How can I add a shortcut to Tinn-R in the start menu or in the desktop?
•
This is automatically done by the installer. If you want to do it man-
ually later on, here are the steps:
1.
Under object explorer, right-click the file
Tinn-R.exe
and se-
lect Create shortcut;
2.
Drag & drop this shortcut to the desktop orwherever you might
want to place it.
Can I save or reuse my preferences on another computer?
•
You have a save/restore configuration tool under
Tools/Backup or
Restore system configuration
or
Database
. Just backup your
config file on one computer, copy it to the computer where you
intend to use the same preferences, then restore them there.
•
The restore function assumes that you are using same OS and user
name.
• Otherwise:
36 BASICS
1.
Unzip the file Tinn-R_X.X.X.X_preferences_bkp in a place of
your choice;
2. Copy the folder Tinn-R;
3. Paste it inside the directory with the Tinn-R folder;
4. To find where that folder is located, from the main menu just
select Help/Ini files (path information).
How can I open a file in Tinn-R by double-clicking it under Windows
Explorer?
•
You need to register Tinn-R as the default program to open files
with a given extension. You can either check this option during
installation or follow the steps below:
1.
In order to open *.R files (Rscripts) with Tinn-R, locate one
such file in your disk;
2.
Right-click this file and select
Open with/Choose program...
in the context menu;
3.
Click
Browse
in the
Open with
dialog box and then select
Tinn-
R.exe;
4.
Make sure the option
Always use the selected program to
open this kind of file is selected;
5. Click OK.
•
Now, when you double-click on a *.R file in the Windows explorer, it
will be opened in Tinn-R.
2.3. FAQ 37
How to define the starting Rgui from within Tinn-R?
•
You can start your preferred Rgui directly from Tinn-R. To do that,
go to Options/Application/R/Path.
•
At the bottom of the dialog box, you can determine the path of the
Rgui executable to start from within Tinn-R. Select
Rgui.exe
from,
for instance, C:\Program Files\R\R-X.X.X\bin\Rgui.exe).
Note: to use R from within Tinn-R, you must first install it from
http://cran.r-project.org
• With Rgui, you must choose SDI mode at Edit/GUI preferences.
Can I define Tinn-R as the default editor for R objects?
•
No, currently, it does not have that capability. In order to do that,
just use the internal script editor of Rgui to edit() or fix() Robjects.
Can I use Emacs or WinEdt style for syntax highlighting color?
•
Just set your preferred color scheme in
Options/Colors (prefer-
ence)
. To change color scheme on other computers, just use the
Op-
tions/Backup/Restore system options
configuration functions
(See details ...).
38 BASICS
What does "Triggers" mean in Options/Application/R/General/Basic?
•
Tips are tooltips displaying the syntax of the currently used Rfunc-
tion.
•
By default, if you enter the name of a function followed by an open
bracket such as
sd(
in a Rcode document, then Tinn-R recognizes
that you call the
sd
Rfunction and reminds you of its syntax by
showing the following tip:
x, na.rm=FALSE
, that is,
sd
accepts two
arguments:
x
, and
na.rm
with the latter having
FALSE
as the default
value.
•
Tinn-R uses a database with the syntax of most common functions
in R. However, neither functions in additional packages nor your
custom functions are cached in this database. Adding them all man-
ually is tedious.
•
Tinn-R therefore offers a second mechanism: direct requests to R.
This is accomplished through DDE and/or TCP/IP protocols, using
functions automatically loaded when you start the TinnR package
you downloaded from CRAN. (See details ...).
•
When a tip is showed (Editor, IO or LOG interface) it is possible to
add all arguments by typing the shortcut CTRL + *.
On some computers, the delay for synchronization might need to be ad-
justed. If Tinn-R seems to freeze while querying Rfor tips and you get no
2.3. FAQ 39
results, increase the value a bit by setting Options/Application/Main/-
General/Computational synchronization (delay).
Can I start R and Tinn-R all at once?
•
There are many ways to accomplish this, but here is one: first, con-
figure Rso that it undersands that you want to use Tinn-R as your
IDE (Integrated Development Environment). In order to do that,
start a new Rsession and add the following command:
> options(IDE = "C:/Tinn-R/bin/Tinn-R.exe")
Replace the path by the present location of Tinn-R.exe on your com-
puter if different from the location above. Then you will indicate that
you want to start the DDE server automatically by setting (valid only
for versions prior to 3.0.1.0, because this communication protocol
was deleted from the project, the only one remaining is TCP/IP):
> options(use.DDE = TRUE)
At this point, Tinn-R will be automatically started when you load
svIDE, at the same time as the Rcall-tip server is installed (valid
only for versions prior to 3.0.1.0):
> library(TinnR)
If those steps work well in manual mode, but you now want them to
run whenever you start R,edit the
Rprofile.site
file (located in the
\
etc
\
subdirectory of R. File location varies, but it should be under
something like C:
\
Program Files
\
R
\
R-X.X.X
\
etc
\
Rprofile.site). Add
the above-mentioned three lines of code at the end of the Rprofile
file (valid only for versions prior to 3.0.1.0).
options(IDE = "C:/Tinn-R/bin/Tinn-R.exe")
options(use.DDE = TRUE)
library(TinnR)
A copy of
Rprofile.site
file created by José Cláudio Faria can be
obtained from SourceForge, which you can adapt according to your
needs. To make sure that everything works well and smoothly, close
both Rand Tinn-R and restart R. Tinn-R should start concomitantly.
Now, create a very simple function in Rsuch as:
40 BASICS
> cube <- function(x) x^3
Switch to Tinn-R and type:
cube(
. You should get a call-tip display-
ing xif the Rcall-tip server was correctly installed.
Hotkeys (operational system)
What is the difference between hotkeys (operational system) and shortcuts
in Tinn-R?
•
The hotkeys are related to the operational system. In other words,
they work without the focus on Tinn-R, whereas the shortcuts will
only work with the focus on the Tinn-R interface.
2.3. FAQ 41
How do I define hotkeys for R tools in Tinn-R?
•
Go to
R/Hotkeys of R
. Once there, define your favorite hotkeys
for the various Rtools and make sure to activate them (Option -
>
Active).
Is there a shortcut for cycling through opened files?
•
Yes, you can use
CTRL + TAB
to go to next file, and
CTRL + SHIFT +
TAB
to go to previous ones when several files are loaded simultane-
ously in Tinn-R.
Is there a shortcut for <- and ->for the S/R languages?
•
The (non user configurable) shortcut for
->
is
CTRL + ADD
key (nu-
meric keypad). Similarly,
CTRL + SUBTRACT
(numeric keypad) is a
shortcut for
<-
.
->
and
<-
, all being assignment symbols in the S/R
languages.
Miscellaneous
I am editing a table. Can I select text in column mode?
•
Yes you can, but you must first make sure that this option is selected.
Go to
Options/Application/Editor/Advanced options
tab and
check (x)
Alt sets column modes
. Once this is done, by pressing
Alt
key while selecting your text with the mouse in Tinn-R, the
selection will be done in column mode.
•
Another option is to change the selection mode to column in a per-
manent way. This is done through the menu
Options/Selection
mode
or by clicking on the selection mode place at the status bar.
The available options are: smNormal,smLine and smColumn.
Can I define bookmarks to facilitate the navigation through my docu-
ments?
•
Yes, you can define up to 10 bookmarks in each of your opened
documents. To define the bookmark, use
CTRL + SHIFT + [0-9]
(a key from 0 to 9). Then, to go to the corresponding bookmark just
use
CTRL + [0-9]
. A visual indicator appears in the right margin at
the location of your bookmarks to remind you where they are.
42 BASICS
What is the left gutter used for?
•
In Tinn-R, bookmarks are visually displayed in the left gutter (use
CTRL + SHIFT + [0-9]
to set bookmarks and then use
CTRL + [0-
9]
to navigate to them). It also displays the respective line num-
bers. You must set gutter
Visible
in
Options/Application/Edi-
tor/Display tab
(and also
Show line numbers
) to activate this
feature.
Can I run my code step-by-step?
•
Yes, but for more convenient use of this function, you must place
Tinn-R and Rside by side on your screen and click on the ’Send line’
icon with the mouse (seventh button from the left on the Rtoolbar).
•
If you use a shortcut, you can just submit one line since the Rconsole
gets the focus when code is sent to R. Alternatively, you can set Tinn-
R as a
topmost
window on top of Rusing
Options/On top
. The
downside is that Tinn-R will permanently hide the Rconsole and
there is a chance that you won’t see a part of the output generated
in Rduring your step-by-step code execution.
Is there a graphical debugger for my R functions?
•
Not yet, but you can download the excellent
debug
package from
CRAN and use the mtrace function available from there.
What is the Tools panel?
•
It is a panel you can open at either the left or the right side of your
text. It helps you to manage large projects with multiple documents.
The
Computer
tab allows you to explore your computer disks and
open one or several files without using
File/Open
, or switching to
the Windows file explorer. The
Project
tab is a convenient manager
for all files collected in a given project.
Can I copy and paste syntax highlighted R code in Word/Web/LaTeX?
•
Syntax highlighted code enhances the code’s visibility. It is conve-
nient in the code editor, but could also be useful for pieces of code
presented elsewhere such as in a report, a Web page, or a LaTeX
2.3. FAQ 43
document. Tinn-R allows you to copy the code while keeping syntax
highlighting color through
Edit/Copy formatted
. Three options
are available: RTF, HTML and TeX.
How can I fix incorrect icon displays on Windows after I have installed a
new version of Tinn-R?
•
If you get an incorrect icon displayed on Windows after installing a
new version of Tinn-R, just proceed as follows:
–
In order to accelerate the display of program or file icons, Win-
dows stores images in the ICON CACHE (ShellIconCache), a
hidden icon cache file in your Windows directory.
–
Sometimes the icon of the object changes, but Windows still
shows the old icon instead of the new one. To solve this prob-
lem, use the shareware program called IconChanger.
–
If you have just installed Tinn-R with a new icon but Windows
has not changed the image yet, use IconChanger and select
REBUILD ICON CACHE. If that still doesn’t work, then select
REMOVE ICON CACHE.
–
If you have selected REBUILD the icon cache will start rebuild-
ing from scratch. If you have selected REMOVE, you will see a
warning message. Select YES and then restart your computer.
Basic instructions about focus control:
•
Tinn-R has a button within the Options toolbar with the hint (Op-
tions: return focus to editor after send/control Rgui) that enables the
user to configure out the focus control. When this option is
checked
Tinn-R will display the following behavior:
–
If the editor has the focus, it will
go back
to the editor after any
send to or R control action, otherwise it will remain on Rgui.
This is also true when working with a dual-monitor display.
•
If the Rterm has the focus, it will be
maintained
in this interface (IO),
disregarding
the Options: return focus to editor after send/control
Rgui.
44 BASICS
Why Tinn-R doesn’t remember my syntax color preferences?
Tinn-R has seven multi-highlighters: HTML complex,PHP complex,R
complex,R doc,R html,R markdown and R noweb, with each one behaving
as follows:
1. HTML complex = HTML & JavaScript
2. PHP complex = HTML & JavaScript & PHP
3. R complex = R & URI ('<<<'begin URI; '>>>'end URI)
4. R doc = TeX & R ('>>='begin R; '@'end R)
5. R html = HTML & R ('<!--begin.rcode'begin R; 'end.rcode-->'end R)
5. R markdown = URI & R ('```{'begin R; '```' end R)
6. R noweb = TeX & R ('>>='begin R; '@'end R)
URI : Uniform Resource Identifiers.
R complex : The main syntax is R, '<<<'and '>>>'are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of URI syntax.
R doc : The main syntax is TeX, '>>='and '@'are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of R syntax.
R html : The main syntax is HTML, '<!--begin.rcode'and 'end.rcode-->'are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of R syntax.
R markdown: The main syntax is URI, '```{'and '```' are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of R syntax.
R noweb : The main syntax is TeX, '>>='and '@'are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of R syntax.
2.3. FAQ 45
These highlighters do not establish priorities when you set the syntax
color preferences. Thus, if you change the color preferences for any of
these multi-highlighters these settings will be valid only in the current
Tinn-R session and will not be saved when Tinn-R is closed. If you want to
make these changes permanent, just set the preferences from all simple
highlighters.
How do I set a block as marked?
•If the file has no marks
: the option will not be available (grayed
out);
•If the file has one or more marks and the cursor is either above
the first mark or below the last mark
: all text (above or below this
mark) will be submitted in relation to the cursor position (above or
below) the mark;
•If the cursor is between any two adjacent marks
: all text between
those two marks will be submitted.
How can I find errors in my script using Rterm interface?
•
The
Application options/R/Rterm
is split in two tabs:
Error
and
Options
. The tab Error has an option:
Trying to find code er-
rors (at the editor)*
. It enables the user to set Tinn-R in order
to find code errors at the editor when sending instructions to Rterm.
•
It may happen that the error will not be found at the right place. For
example, the error might be the same word appearing in a comment
which comes before the actual code. In that case the user should
use the shortcut
F3 (Find again)
. The word will appear selected,
than just press OK until finding the right error. The first search
done internally by Tinn-R has Case sensitive and Whole word only as
default, but, this is not passed to the search interface, therefore the
user should just select them if convenient. If the error has numbers
among letters Whole word only is not a good option.
The comunication between Tinn-R and Rgui.exe seems to freeze!
•First, it is not necessary to reinstall the Tinn-R nor R!
46 BASICS
•
In some Windows flavors the communication between
Rgui
and
Tinn-R
sporadically seems to freeze. The cause of this bug is still
unknown to us and seems to be related to the new features of some
Windows flavors. However, the solution is very simple: rest your
mouse (without pressing for a few seconds) on the icon of the Tinn-
R on the taskbar of windows...: the communication should be re-
stored automatically.
The comunication between Tinn-R and Rterm.exe seems to freeze using
knit function!
•
To all
knit
procedures it will be added the argument
quiet=TRUE
. It
is very dificult to sincronize the
txtProgreesBar
used in these func-
tions and
Rterm
interface. So, if you want more control, we suggest
(for while) to use the knit with Rgui.exe intead of Rterm.exe.
How to make Ctrl+Shift+0 mark works?
For Windows 10, do the following (it may be a bit different for Windows 8):
1.
In the control panel, click Language. This brings up the "Language"
panel.
2.
Choose "Advanced Settings" in the left area. This brings up the
"Advanced Settings" panel.
3.
Choose "Change language bar hot keys". This brings up the "Text
Services Input Language" panel.
4.
Select that item and click the "Change Key Sequence" button. This
brings up the "Change Key Sequence" panel.
5.
Set the Ctrl +Shift in both radio buttons to "Not Assigned" and click
OK.
CHAPTER 3
WORKING WITH
This chapter provides information on how to work using Tinn-R.
47
48 WORKING WITH
3.1 APPLICATION OPTIONS
FIGURE 3.1: Tinn-R: Main resources.
Tinn-R interface (Figure 3.1) is very flexible and user configurable. It is
necessary time to know all available resources and to configure this out
(according to your preferences) in a nice way. The default set of options
might not be suitable for every user.
The window Application options allows the user to set the major piece of
user preferences related to the application.
It must be clear from now on that the Tinn-R project is the sum of three
main resources (Figure 3.1): The application
per se (1)
,additional
Tools
(2)
and the instances of the
SynEdit class (3)
. The
Tools (2)
was pro-
jected to allows the expansion of resources.
The options visible in all pictures reflect a set of the project coordinator
preferences.
Main
Figure 3.2 and Table 3.1 show the options related to this topic.
3.1. APPLICATION OPTIONS 49
FIGURE 3.2: Main (Options/Application).
Since the options are self-explanatory, Table 3.1 only gives some details
about the most difficult options to understand.
Editor
The Editor window (Figures 3.3,3.4 and 3.6) was adapted from the sources
of the SynEdit component, mainly related to the general appearance and
standardoptions. The set of options available complementthe Application
options and allows high level of customization.
Display:
Figure 3.3 and Table 3.2 show the main resources.
Advanced:
50 WORKING WITH
Option Description
Computational syncronization (delay)
Several processes are dependent on synchronization between applications
(R, converters, compilers). The optimal value of the delay is determined by
the following characteristics: user habits, hardware and software available.
The ideal value is unique to the various possible combinations of those
three characteristics. Try to reduce to the minimum value (50 ms) and test
it: if something does not work, increase it gradually and keep testing until
getting to the optimal value. The default value (100 ms) may not be optimal
for all users.
Remove extension for Save as All file extensions will be removed in the Save as Windows interface
Application colors (extensive text only)
Dark colors (low level of radiation) for the background, and pale light (high
level of radiation) for the characters are reccomended for people who work
with the computer/monitor for long periods. Pictures of this user guide ire
like this
Table 3.1: Same main options
FIGURE 3.3: Editor options: Display.
Figure 3.4 and Table 3.3 show the main resources.
Encoding/EOL:
This interface (Figure 3.5) allows to change the default encoding and EOL
when creating new files and also the user option related to UTF-8 files.
Keystrokes:
This interface (Figure 3.6) allows to change the default SynEdit keystrokes.
It is possible to make new, edit or remove any ecAction (execute command
3.1. APPLICATION OPTIONS 51
Option Description
Edge column
Will be showed as a vertical line in the editor and the default
is 80 characters. Set it to 0 or a negative value (-1) to make
the edge column not visible
Edge color Choice of the edge color
Tab width
Set the number of characters that will be inserted when
typing the Tab key
Extra lines Set the width which each single line will be displayed
Font
Will open the Windows interface for choosing installed fonts
Gutter color Will open the Windows interface to choose a color
Visible Visibility option
Autosize Autosize option
Show line number Show line number option
Start at zero Start at zero option
Show leading zeros Show leading zeros option
Use gutter font Use gutter font option
Table 3.2: Display (Options/Editor).
Option Description
Auto indent
Will indent the caret (position of the cursor in the current line) on new lines with the
same amount of leading white space as the preceding line
Auto size scroll width Automatically resizes the MaxScrollWidth property when inserting text
Drag and drop editing
Allows you to select a block of text and drag it within the document to another location
Alt sets column mode Holding down the <ALT>key will put the selection mode into column format
Maintain caret column
When moving through lines w/o cursor past EOL, keeps the X position of the cursor
Want tabs (ind./unind. select.)
When tabbing (if there is a selection)
<
TAB
>
and
<
SHIFT
><
TAB
>
act as block indent,
unindent
Smart tabs
When tabbing, the cursor will go to the next non-white space character of the previous
line
Backspace to last character The cursor will go to the next non-white space character of the line
Enhance home key Enhances HOME key positioning, similar to visual studio
Enhance end Key Enhances END key positioning, similar to JDeveloper
Hide scrollbars as necessary
If enabled, then the scrollbars will only show when necessary. If you have ScrollPas-
tEOL, then the horizontal bar will always be there (it uses MaxLength instead)
Disable scroll arrows
Disables the scroll bar arrow buttons when you can’t scroll in that direction any more
Half page scroll
When scrolling with page-up and page-down commands, only scroll a half page at a
time
Scroll by one less Forces scrolling to be one less
Scroll past end of file Allows the cursor to go past the end of file marker
Scroll past end of line
Allows the cursor to go past the last character into the white space at the end of a line
Show scroll hint Shows a hint of the visible line numbers when scrolling vertically
Scroll hint follows mouse The scroll hint follows the mouse when scrolling vertically
Tabs to spaces Converts a tab character to a specified number of space characters
Trim trailing spaces Spaces at the end of lines will be trimmed and not saved
Group undo
When undoing/redoing actions, handle all continuous changes of the same kind in
one call instead undoing/redoing each command separately
Right mouse moves cursor
When clicking with the right mouse for a pop-up menu, move the cursor to that
location
Show special chars Shows the special characters
Insert caret A list with four options: Vertical line, Horizontal line, Half block and block
Overwrite caret A list with options: Vertical line, Horizontal line, Half block and block
Table 3.3: Display (Options/Editor).
52 WORKING WITH
FIGURE 3.4: Editor options: Advanced.
FIGURE 3.5: Editor options: encoding/EOL.
action). A set of user friendly keystrokes gives high productivity leading
with all instances of the main class SynEdit: Editor, IO and LOG.
3.1. APPLICATION OPTIONS 53
FIGURE 3.6: Editor options: keystrokes.
R
Figures 3.7,3.8,3.9 and 3.10 shows a set of options available. As you can
see, it allows a high level of customization with the Renvironment.
Processing
There are resources (Figure 3.11 and 3.12) related to conversion (Deplate,
Pandoc and Txt2tags) and compilation (Miktex).
Conversion:
Tinn-R project makes it easy to work with these nice conversion tools:
Deplate, Pandoc and Txt2tags. (Figure 3.11).
54 WORKING WITH
FIGURE 3.7: R (Options/Application).
LaTex:
Tinn-R is not a specific editor to L
A
T
E
X, but it has the basic resources (Figure
3.12) allowing the user to use the main resources of this environment.
3.1. APPLICATION OPTIONS 55
FIGURE 3.8: R (Options/Application).
FIGURE 3.9: R (Options/Application).
56 WORKING WITH
FIGURE 3.10: R (Options/Application).
3.2 SELECTION MODE
Allows the setting of the current selection mode (Figure 3.13,3.14 and
3.15).
Select text by clicking and dragging with the left mouse button held down
or moving the cursor with the shift key held down. The status bar will
display an icon indicating the current selection mode.
Normal
This is the standard selection mode (Figure 3.13) found in many Windows
applications.
3.2. SELECTION MODE 57
FIGURE 3.11: Conversion (Options/Application/Processing).
Line
This selection mode (Figure 3.14) allows only for complete lines to be
selected.
Column
This selection mode (Figure 3.15) allows vertical blocks of text to be se-
lected. The option
ALT
sets column mode allowing the selection mode to
be switched to Column Mode when selecting with the mouse by simply
holding down the ALT key. See details at editor (advanced options).
58 WORKING WITH
FIGURE 3.12: Latex (Options/Application/Processing).
FIGURE 3.13: Normal (selection mode).
FIGURE 3.14: Line (selection mode).
3.3. HIGHLIGHTERS (SETTINGS) 59
FIGURE 3.15: Column (selection mode).
3.3 HIGHLIGHTERS (SETTINGS)
FIGURE 3.16: Highlighter preferences.
This interface (Figure 3.16) allows you to customize the appearance and
colors of the instances of the class SynEdit (Editor, IO and LOG).
The interface is simple and self-explanatory.
Basically, make a choice between the set of highlighters available from the
Highlighters list. The identifier of the selected highlighter will be updated.
It is possible to set only one foreground attribute each time. But it is possi-
ble to set the background for all attributes of the selected highlighter and
also the background of all attributes of all highlighters.
It is also possible to set the color brackets and the active line background.
Observation:
60 WORKING WITH
Tinn-R has seven multi-highlighters: HTML complex,PHP complex,R
complex,R doc,R html,R markdown and R noweb, with each one behaving
as follows:
1. HTML complex = HTML & JavaScript
2. PHP complex = HTML & JavaScript & PHP
3. R complex = R & URI ('<<<'begin URI; '>>>'end URI)
4. R doc = TeX & R ('>>='begin R; '@'end R)
5. R html = HTML & R ('<!--begin.rcode'begin R; 'end.rcode-->'end R)
5. R markdown = URI & R ('```{'begin R; '```' end R)
6. R noweb = TeX & R ('>>='begin R; '@'end R)
URI : Uniform Resource Identifiers.
R complex : The main syntax is R, '<<<'and '>>>'are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of URI syntax.
R doc : The main syntax is TeX, '>>='and '@'are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of R syntax.
R html : The main syntax is HTML, '<!--begin.rcode'and 'end.rcode-->'are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of R syntax.
R markdown: The main syntax is URI, '```{'and '```' are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of R syntax.
R noweb : The main syntax is TeX, '>>='and '@'are the tags enabling
the user to insert a block of R syntax.
These highlighters haven’t priorities when you set the syntax color prefer-
ences. Thus, if you change the colors’ preferences of any of these multi-
highlighters these settings will be valid only in the current Tinn-R session
and will not be saved when Tinn-R is closed. So, if you want to make
permanent changes, set the preferences from all simple highlighters.
From version 3.0.1.0 a warning message is displayed whenever a multi-
highlighter is selected. It shows which highlighters the user must change
the characteristics so that they are properly stored and henceforth always
displayed.
3.4. SHORTCUTS CUSTOMIZATION 61
3.4 SHORTCUTS CUSTOMIZATION
FIGURE 3.17: Shortcuts customization.
The Shortcuts customization (Figure 3.17) allows the user to set the short-
cuts related to the application, it works together with the Editor keystrokes,
and allows for high level of customization.
The difference between Shortcuts and Hotkeys (operational system) is that
the former works only with the focus on Tinn-R, whereas hotkeys work
with the focus anywhere.
Read below a brief description of available buttons.
Restore default:
Restores the file
Shortcuts.xml
from the origin (Install-
Path/data/data.zip). Any prior changes to the file
Shortcuts.xml
in
use will be lost.
Save as default:
Opens the save dialog allowing to save the file. From this
point, this file will be the new default shortcuts.
Load:
Opens the open dialog allowing to load a shortcut file. From this point
on, this file will be the new default shortcuts.
Edit: Sets the table in edition mode.
Cancel current: Cancels any changes made to the current edition.
Cancel all:
Cancels all changes made to the database prior to Save or Save
as default.
Save: Saves to text file (XML) all changes made to the current table.
Close: Closes the dialog. All changes not saved will be lost.
62 WORKING WITH
3.5 HOTKEYS (OPERATIONAL SYSTEM)
FIGURE 3.18: Hotkeys.
The Hotkeys (operational system) (Figure 3.18) allow setting the hotkeys
related to the operational system. The difference between those hotkeys
and Shortcuts customization is that the latter works only with the focus in
Tinn-R, whereas the hotkeys work with the focus anywhere.
The interface is self-explanatory. Basically you first make a choice from
the R/Hotkeys (operational system) and set the desired Hotkey.
The set of hotkeys will perform actions only if the option Active is checked.
The objective of these options (Inactive and Active) is to avoid conflict with
others applications allowing to enable/disable the set of hotkeys quickly
and easily.
The
R/Hotkeys
interface was deeply reworked in the version 2.4.0.0 and
it now has two tabs, Default and Custom:
•Default: Contains the already traditional instructions of Tinn-R;
•Custom
:
Allows the user to customize any instructions
to be send
to Rinterpreter (thanks to Philemon Lenherr for the suggestion).
3.5. HOTKEYS (OPERATIONAL SYSTEM) 63
The instructions must be as follows:
–
Simple:
search()
. The Rinterpreter will receive
>search()
;
–
Replace word or small selection:
View(%s, title=’View of
iris dataset’)
. If the editor cursor is over the word
iris
or it is selected, the Rinterpreter will receive
>View(iris,
title=’View of iris dataset’)
–
Replace whole file:
source(%f, echo=TRUE, verbose=TRUE)
.
The Rinterpreterwill receive
>source(.trPaths[4], echo=TRUE,
verbose=TRUE). All rules related to send file are preserved.
64 WORKING WITH
3.6 RTERM INTERFACE
FIGURE 3.19: Rterm interface.
The implementation of a Rterm interface (Figure 3.19,3.20 and 3.21) in
Tinn-R has the following aims:
•
To address some limitations (edition, navigation and control) im-
posed by the Rgui.exe interface;
• To add more flexibility and power to the GUI/Editor;
•
To maintain the prior user knowledge associated with Tinn-R editor
and the Rgui console;
• To maintain the structural simplicity of the application;
•
To use a more efficient engine ofInter Process Communication (IPC)
than the Windows clipboard used in previous versions.
The IO (Figure 3.20) and LOG (Figure 3.21) interfaces are instances of the
class SynEdit. In other words, all prior user knowledge of the resources
associated with the editor were preserved:
• Free navigation with keyboard keys;
• Marks;
• Shortcuts;
• Syntax;
3.6. RTERM INTERFACE 65
• Match brackets;
• Tips;
• Data completion;
• Edition: copy, paste, cut, etc;
•
Selection/copy/paste in column mode:
ALT + drag the mouse
, if
this option is checked (see editor options), etc.
1.
IO (Figure 3.20): The aim was to add flexibility and power,i.e., joining
the power of SynEdit (editor) and the functionality of a common
console.
2. LOG (Figure 3.21): Has three basic objectives:
a) To receive and show warnings and error messages;
b) To make the IO interface cleaner;
c)
To avoid synchronization difficulties with the inter process
communication (IPC) called pipe used.
When more than one recognized instance of Ris running the priority order
is:
1. Rterm;
2. Rgui;
3. Rserver (remote);
IO
The IO interface (Figure 3.20 and Table 3.4) is used to receive output
(SDTOUT) from the Renvironment.
It is necessary to adjust some Roptions (for example:
options(width=70)
to obtain a suitable number of characters in each single line, according to
hardware and user preferences (side of IO, place of IO, length of IO, width
of IO, type and size of font). Once you get a suitable result, it is a good
practice to add this option to the
Rprofile.site
(located inside of the
folder etc where the Rwas installed) file. Thus, your option will always be
set when starting R.
The IO is an instance of SynEdit. Therefore, it can be edited and used like
the editor, allowing the tasks showed in the Table 3.4.
If the IO has the focus, all actions of the Rtoolbar and main menu associ-
ated with control Rcan be used in the IO interface.
66 WORKING WITH
FIGURE 3.20: IO (Rterm interface).
Resource Description
Edition
All resources available to the editor (copy, paste, cut, etc)
can be used
Free navigation
Using keyboard keys: Home, Page Up, Page Down, End, Left,
Top, Right and Bottom
Marks CTRL + [0..9]
can be used to mark,
SHIFT + CTRL +
[0..9] to go to prior marks
Shortcuts All shortcuts available to the editor are also to the IO
Syntax Two options: Text and R
Match brackets
Makes it easier to build more complex instructions like
plot(sqrt(rnorm(1e3)), pch=’.’, cex=3)
Tips Are invoked using the same trigger as the editor
Data completion Are invoked using the same trigger as the editor
Table 3.4: IO interface, main resources available.
The IO interface has a special pop-up menu allowing the most common
tasks. It is self-explanatory. So, make a small tour (right mouse button
inside of Rterm/IO) to find out about its options.
Some details:
•
Shortcuts and pop-up menu make it easy to change among the
interfaces: Editor,IO and LOG:
1.
if IO and LOG are in distinct tabs (views), the common Win-
dows shortcut
CTRL + TAB
changes the active page (IO-LOG).
2.
Any prior line can be sent another time by just putting the
cursor in any place of it and typing: CTRL + ENTER;
3.6. RTERM INTERFACE 67
• The last line of the IO interface (the prompt) has special features:
1. It has some restrictions for edition and navigation;
2. ALT+DOWN
and
ALT+UP
are the shortcuts (prior/later) for com-
mand history. The history is continuous, cyclic, and have a 100
line limit.
LOG
FIGURE 3.21: LOG (Rterm interface).
The LOG interface (Figure 3.21) is used to receive warnings and error
messages (SDTERR) from the Renvironment.
It has a special pop-up menu that allows the most common tasks. It is
self-explanatory. So, take a small tour (right mouse buttom inside of Rter-
m/LOG) to know all options.
Most of the resources available to the IO are also available to this interface.
68 WORKING WITH
3.7 TOOLS INTERFACE
This graphical interface (Figure 3.22) was projected to allow access to
Tinn-R resources and also to accommodate future growth of related news
resources.
Position: starting from version 2.1.1.1 (Oct/15/2008) this interface is dock-
able. It can float or be docked on the left, top, right, or bottom sides of the
main interface.
Misc
FIGURE 3.22: Tools interface.
Tool Description
Windows expl. See details ...
Work expl. See details ...
Project See details ...
Table 3.5: Misc (tools)
The resources are showed in Figure 3.22 and Table 3.5.
Windows expl.:
See Figure 3.22.
• Allows manager favorites (add and remove);
• Allows filter by file extension;
• Has pop-up menus similar to Windows explorer;
3.7. TOOLS INTERFACE 69
•
Support drag and drop actions (it is possible to drag any file and
drop it on the editor interface to be opened).
Work expl.:
See Figure 3.22.
• Always shows the folder related to the latest file opened;
• Does not have a pop-up menu;
•
Supports drag and drop actions, i.e, it is possible to drag any file and
drop it in the editor interface that will be opened.
Project:
See Figure 3.22.
• Allows for project management using a graphical interface;
•
Supports drag and drop actions, ie, it is possible to drag the en-
tire project, groups, or any file and then drop them into the editor
interface that will be opened:
–Project: will open all files related to the current project;
–Group: will open all files for the selected group;
–File: will open the selected file.
•
It is possible to send an entire project, a selected group, or an indi-
vidual file to the Renvironment through a pop-up menu.
• Source file of project:
–
It is possible to edit the project in text mode (with the but-
ton Project: edit (as text file) of the specific toolbar). After any
change, save the text file (it contains the textual description
of the project structure) and reload the file to the graphical
interface (with the button Project: reload (from text file) of the
specific toolbar).
–
Any changes to the graphical interface will be reflected in the
text file for the project, after it is saved.
–
The best way to work with projectis (graphics of textual mode)
depends on the complexity of the actions and the user prefer-
ence. For single tasks, we suggest that you use the graphical
mode. For complex actions, it is faster to use the textual mode
with all editor resources.
70 WORKING WITH
Tool Description
Txt2tags Sets marks, macros and settings of Txt2tags convertor
LaTeX Sets L
A
T
EX symbols settings in a customizable manner
Table 3.6: Markup (Tools).
Markup
FIGURE 3.23: Markups (Tools).
It contains resources (Figure 3.23 and Table 3.6) related to the Txt2tags
and L
A
T
EX.
Txt2tags:
Sets (Figure 3.23) marks, macros, and settings for the Txt2tags convertor.
A single click over any graphical will add it to the current editor.
LaTeX:
Set (Figure 3.23) of L
A
T
E
X symbols. A single click over any graphical object
will add it to the current editor;
The symbols, place and order of all symbols are customizable. To cus-
tomize them, open the folder latex and edit ini path. At the end of the
edition, update the interface using the button Latex: reload symbols (from
ini). Be careful when editing the symbols to maintain the name struc-
ture. For example:
Number_SymbolName.FileExtension
,
001_alpha.gif
,
002_beta.gif
. The number will be used to order symbols in the graphical
interface, while the name will be used (if recognized) as a L
A
T
EX symbol.
3.7. TOOLS INTERFACE 71
Tool Description
Ini log Displays useful results when starting Tinn-R
Search Interface for Search results associated with Search in files
Hex viewer Interface for hex viewer
Table 3.7: Results (Tools).
Results
It contains resources (Table 3.7) related to Ini log,Search and Hex viewer.
Ini log:
FIGURE 3.24: Inilog (Tools/Results).
Displays (Figure 3.24 and Table 3.8) useful results when starting Tinn-R.
If you submit a bug report, please also send the results for the respective
page by copying & pasting.
Search:
The interface (Figure 3.25) for Search results associated with Search in
files.
The results for the Search in files actions are displayed as a tree with all
files. Double click the file to open it in the editor interface.
Hex viewer:
72 WORKING WITH
Topic Description
Path of executable and sources (origin) Lists executable files and resources
Path of ini folders Lists the path of all folders of the ini
Verification of necessary folder and files Lists the status of folders and files of ini
Tinn-R,app,bkp,colors,editor, syntax, syn-
tax bkp and tmp
Lists the status of these folders
Data (version) Lists the status of this folder and files
Latex (version) Lists the status of this folder and files
Project (version) Lists the status of this folder and files
Editor options
Shortcuts (version)
Lists the status of this folder and files
Unihighlighter (version) Lists the status of this folder and files
Tmp Lists the status of this folder
Table 3.8: Ini log
FIGURE 3.25: Search (Tools/Results).
The interface (Figure 3.26) for Hex viewer results associated to any active
file.
Spell
Tool Description
Spell Interface to speller
To enable spellchecking with Tinn-R it is necessary to install at least one
dictionary of the list of available ones. It is also a good idea to install the
dictionary manager. See instructions ....
3.7. TOOLS INTERFACE 73
FIGURE 3.26: Hex (Tools/Hex viewer).
FIGURE 3.27: Spelling (Tools).
Database
The database (Figure 3.28 and Table 3.9) uses the native XML engine
provided by Borland. Each tab (Shortcuts,Completion and Comments)
has its own pop-up menus and toolbars.
Shortcuts:
The Shortcuts interface allows the user to find out about the internal orga-
nization of Tinn-R and also to customize all shortcuts related to the appli-
cation. It is our intention, in the near future, to add additional keystrokes
related to the editor and to the Rhotkeys.
The available buttons (Figure 3.28) are:
74 WORKING WITH
FIGURE 3.28: Database (Tools).
Tool Description
Shortcuts A digital shortcuts interface based in a XML database
Completion A digital completion interface based in a XML database
Comments A digital comments interface based in a XML database
Table 3.9: Database (Tools)
Help: Opens the User guide.
Edit: Opens the dialog Completion database (xml based).
The Edit button opens the dialog shown in the Figure 3.38.
3.7. TOOLS INTERFACE 75
Completion:
The Completion resource is very simple and allows high level of user cus-
tomization related to edition. The old implementation of completion
resource showed instability and was replaced. We hope that the users will
like this new one.
This resource adds a granular level of user customization for editing all
within Tinn-R.
The completion (database based) allows the user to add functions based
on several programming languages such as R, T
EX, among others.
The available buttons (Figure 3.28) are:
Help: Sends the following instruction to R:help(’selected function’).
Example:
Sends the following instruction to R:
example(’selected func-
tion’).
Copy function: Places the selected function in the clipboard.
Copy description:
Places the description of the selected function in the
clipboard.
Edit: Opens the dialog Completion database (xml based) below.
Insert:
Inserts the selected function in the active editor. A
Double click
or
Enter
performs the same function. The default shortcut is
CTRL
+ J
, but this can be customized under Options/Shortcuts or Tools/-
Database/Shortcuts. To use it just push the keystrokes after any valid
word:
if<CTRL + J> to obtain:
if (| < )
ifc<CTRL + J> to obtain:
if(|<){
}
fo<CTRL + J> to obtain:
for (i in 1:i|)
foc<CTRL + J> to obtain:
for (i in 1:|) {
}
sw<CTRL + J> to obtain:
switch(|,
a = ' ',
b = ' ',
)
wh<CTRL + J> to obtain:
i=0
while (i < |) {
76 WORKING WITH
i=i+1
}
eq<CTRL + J> to obtain:
\begin{equation}\label{eq_01}
|
\end{equation}
Observations:
1.
Only two letters were used to define the functions (for example:
fo =for,fu =function);
2.
Therefore, we added the letter
c
for more complex structures (for
example: foc,fuc);
3.
The
|
symbol is used to define where the cursor will first stop
after auto-completion. After being selected the
|
symbol marks
the point where the user can start typing.
The Edit button opens the dialog showed in the Figure 3.39.
Comments:
The Comments resource is very simple and allows high level of user cus-
tomization.
From version 3.0.1.0 Tinn-R automatically recognizes the language of the
file on focus. Further, inside the file - if it is a syntax a multi-highlighter
(complex syntax) - which language of the line where the cursor (or selec-
tion) is found.
This identification is done automatically if (and only if) the option (x) Auto
detect language (recomended) is checked. Otherwise the user is forcing
the application to use the comments of the selected language (indicator
arrow).
Selected code snippets involving more than one language will not be
commented/uncommented and a warning message is issued. That is, you
must select only the snippet of a single language.
The available buttons (Figure 3.28) are:
Help: It opens the User Guide on the section Databases.
Edit: It opens the dialog R card database (xml based).
The Edit button opens the dialog shown in the Figure 3.40.
3.7. TOOLS INTERFACE 77
Tool Description
Explorer
Simple and functional graphical interface of objects of the
Renvironment
Card A digital and simple Rcard based in a XML database
Mirrors
A digital and simple Rmirrors management based in a XML
database
Table 3.10: R (Tools).
R
FIGURE 3.29: R (Tools).
A simple and functional graphical interface (Figure 3.29 and Table 3.10)
of objects, card and mirrors management of the Renvironment.
Explorer:
This interface (Figure 3.29) has its own pop-up menu, toolbar and three
combo box. The pop-up menu and toolbar contain the most common
actions related to an object explorer.
The button R explorer: refresh environment sends an instruction to Renvi-
ronment requesting the list of all loaded packages in the current session.
The result is shown inside a graphical classified list. When one of these is
selected, the graphical list (and structure) of the objects are shown.
There are two options of filter: type of objects and any sequence of char-
acters associated with the names of the objects.
It is possible to remove visible objects of the user workspace (.GlobalEnv)
using the key Delete. To do this, select an object and type Delete.
78 WORKING WITH
A double click in any selected object will add its name to the editor. If
the object is dragged to the editor interface, the textual description of the
object is always shown in a new file. It is useful to know the sources of
functions and to see data objects (vectors, frames, list, etc).
Card:
The card was based on two Rcards already published: R/Rpad Reference
Card by Tom Short and Rreference card by Jonathan Baron.
FIGURE 3.30: R card (Database).
The available buttons (Figure 3.29) are:
Help: Sends the following instruction to R:help(’selected function’).
Example:
Sends the following instruction to R:
example(’selected func-
tion’).
Copy function: Places the selected function in the clipboard.
Copy descrition:
Places the descrition of the selected function on the clip-
board.
Edit: Opens the dialog R card database (xml based) below.
Insert:
Inserts the selected function in the active editor. A
Double click
or
Enter performs the same function.
The Edit button opens the dialog shown in the Figure 3.30.
Read below a brief description of available buttons:
Restore default:
Restores the file
Rcard.xml
from the origin at (
InstallPath/data/data.zip
).
Any prior changes in the file
Rcard.xml
currently being used will be
lost.
New: Places the table in insertion mode.
Delete: Delete the current registry from the table.
Edit: Places the table in edition mode.
Cancel current: Cancels any change made to the current edition.
Cancel all: Cancels all changes made to the database prior to Save.
3.7. TOOLS INTERFACE 79
Save:
Overwrites the text file (XML) saving all changes made to the current
table.
Close: Closes the dialog. All non-saved changes will be lost.
Mirrors:
The Mirrors is an interface that allows the user to manage the repositories
(or mirrors) of R. You should always choose a repository physically closest
to where you are, so that, the Web communication tends to be faster and
more efficient.
The default mirror is the University Wien (Austria). Consider that this is
the central mirror of CRAN.
The reasons for the Tinn-R always set a repository are two:
•
Prevent Rkeep asking which repository you want to use in each
session;
•
Workaround of intermittency (only Rterm) display the dialog for
selecting the repository. That is, sometimes the dialog is displayed
and not others. The cause of this intermittency is still unknown.
FIGURE 3.31: R mirrors (Database).
The available buttons (Figure 3.29) are:
Help: Opens the User guide.
Update: Updates the available Rmirrors.
Copy host: Places the selected mirror host in the clipboard.
Copy URL: Places the selected mirror URL in the clipboard.
Edit: Opens the dialog R mirrors (xml based) below.
Insert:
Sends the following instruction to R:
options(’repos=’URL of se-
lected mirror’).
The Edit button opens the dialog shown in the Figure 3.31.
Read below a brief description of available buttons:
80 WORKING WITH
Restore default:
Restores the file
Rmirrors.xml
from the origin at (
InstallPath/data/data.zip
).
Any prior change to the file
Rmirrors.xml
while being used will be
lost.
New: Places the table in insertion mode.
Delete: Deletes the current registry from the table.
Edit: Places the table in edition mode.
Cancel current:
Cancels any change made during the current editing ses-
sion.
Cancel all: Cancels all changes made to the database prior to Save.
Save:
Overwrites the text file (XML) while saving all changes made to the
current table.
Close: Closes the dialog. All changes not previously saved will be lost.
3.8. FILE TABS 81
3.8 FILE TABS
FIGURE 3.32: File tabs.
FIGURE 3.33: File tabs menu.
The position of the file tabs (Figure 3.32) can be changed by drag and drop.
It allows to put the file tab in a desirable order making it suitable for the
user interface.
The file tabs have itheir own pop-up menu (Figure 3.33) allowing fast
control of the most common tasks.
82 WORKING WITH
3.9 TOOLS BAR
FIGURE 3.34: Tools bar.
Category Description
File New, open, save, save all, reload and print
Edit Undo and redo
Filter
Create a new file with all occurrences of typed sequence of
characters
Macro Record and play
Misc On top, focus control and block marks
Processing Conversion, compilation and viewer
RLots of options to send and control R
Search Current file, in files, replace and go to line
Syntax Drop down list of all syntaxes available
Spell
Drop down list of installed dictionaries and a bottom to
start the speller
View
Organize screen, Tools (show/hide), Tools (size), Rterm
(show/hide, Rterm (size), options to IO and LOG and word
wrap
Table 3.11: Tools bar.
Unlike most applications of this category, this interface (Figure 3.34) was
designed to be as small and simple as possible. In other words, the full
access to all resources of Tinn-R are available at the main menu and asso-
ciated shortcuts (it takes time to learn all and most are user configurable).
Two groups are available: main and Rtool bar.
The main toolbar interface is categorized (Table 3.11) and contains the
most common tasks:
The Rtoolbar has two basic divisions: Send (left side, finishing in the
Set work directory buttom) and Control (right side, starting in the List all
objects buttom).
Show/Hide
The Tools bar has its own pop-up (Figure 3.35) menu enabling the user
to choose what resources will be visible (show/hide). To see the pop-up
menu, press the right mouse buttom inside any place of the main tool bar.
Disposition
The interface also allows drag and drop. In other words, you can organize
the order of the individual tool bar inside of the main container.
3.9. TOOLS BAR 83
FIGURE 3.35: Tools bar menu.
It is better to do that with the main interface not maximized to avoid
screen flicker (a small nuance related to some version of the Windows and
Borland engine).
84 WORKING WITH
3.10 FIND AND REPLACE
FIGURE 3.36: Find and replace dialog.
The dialogs for Find and Replace (Figure 3.36) are very similar, so this
session will just discuss the Replace dialog and will point out the changes
when necessary.
Find
When you call up the Find dialog the Find for box will be prefilled with
the word under the cursor. You can type over the entry if you are looking
for another word. There is also a dropdown list of phrases previously
searched.
Replace (Replace dialog only)
When you call up the Replace dialog the Replace with box will be filled with
the last string you entered in it. If this is the first time you have called the
Replace dialog since starting Tinn-R then the Replace box will be empty.
You can type over any text in box. There is also a dropdown list of strings
previously used.
Options:
Case sensitive:
When this option is set the search is done case sensitively.
For instance,
Ab
,
AB
and
ab
are all treated as different words whereas
they are not if the option is not set.
Whole words only:
When this option is set the system will only find com-
plete words matching the search criteria. So, for example, if
ab
is the
search string the system will not match occurrences of words like
abc
or cab.
Regular expressions: See regular expressions ...
Direction:
The direction to search. This option is ignored if searching in selected text.
Forward: Search from the cursor position to the end of the file.
3.10. FIND AND REPLACE 85
Backward: Search from the cursor position to the beginning of the file.
Scope:
Global: Search the entire file.
Selected Text: Search just the selected text.
Origin:
Global: Search from the beginning of the file.
From cursor: Search just from the position of the cursor.
86 WORKING WITH
3.11 SEARCH IN FILES
FIGURE 3.37: Search in files.
The Search in files dialog (Figure 3.37) allows you to match a criteria in all
opened files and/or in files on disk.
Options
Case sensitive:
When this option is set the search is case sensitive. For ex-
ample, Ab,AB and ab are all treated as different words.
Whole words only:
When this option is set the system will only find com-
plete words matching the search criteria. For example, if
ab
is the
search string the system will not match occurrences of words such as
abc or cab.
Regular expressions: See regular expressions ...
Where
Opened files:
When this option is set the search is performed on all opened
files.
Directories: When this option is set the search is performed in disk files.
Directory options
Directory: A dropdown list of previously searched directories.
File mask: A dropdown list of the previously searched file mask.
Search in sub directories:
When this option is set the search is performed
on all sub directories of the main directory.
3.11. SEARCH IN FILES 87
Results interface
The associated results interface (Figure 3.37) shows the results.
A double click in a single occurrence (or dragging and dropping it into the
editor interface) will open the file and results will be placed in the first
line of the editor window.
88 WORKING WITH
3.12 DATABASES
All databases uses the native XML engine provided by Borland.
Shortcuts
FIGURE 3.38: Shortcuts (Databases).
Read below for a brief description of available buttons (Figure 3.38):
Restore default:
Restores the file
Shortcuts.xml
from the origin (Install-
Path/data/data.zip). Any prior changes to the file
Shortcuts.xml
cur-
rently being used will be lost.
Save as default:
Opens the save dialog allowing you to save the file. From
this point on, this file will be the new default shortcut.
Load:
Opens the open dialog allowing you to load a shortcut file. From this
point on, this file will be the new default shortcut.
Edit: Places the table in edition mode.
Cancel current: Cancels any change made to the current edition.
Cancel all:
Cancels all changes made to the database prior to Save or Save
as default.
Save:
Overwrites the text file (XML) saving all changes made to the current
table.
Close: Closes the dialog. All non-saved changes will be lost.
Completion
This resource adds a granular level of user customization for editing all
within Tinn-R.
The completion (database based) allows the user to add functions based
on several programming languages such as R, T
EX, among others.
Read below for a brief description of available buttons (Figure 3.39):
Restore default:
Restores the file
Completion.xml
from the origin at (
InstallPath/data/data.zip
).
Any prior change to the file Completion.xml being used will be lost.
3.12. DATABASES 89
FIGURE 3.39: Completion (Databases).
New: Places the table in insertion mode.
Delete: Deletes the current registry from the table.
Edit: Places the table in edition mode.
Cancel current: Cancels any change made to the current edition.
Cancel all: Cancels all changes made to the database prior to Save.
Save:
Overwrites the text file (XML), saving all changes made to the current
table.
Close: Closes the dialog. All non-saved changes will be lost.
Comments
FIGURE 3.40: Comments (Databases).
The Comments resource is very simple and allows high level of user cus-
tomization.
From version 3.0.1.0 Tinn-R automatically recognizes the language of the
file on focus. Further, inside the file - if it is a syntax a multi-highlighter
(complex syntax) - which language of the line where the cursor (or selec-
tion) is found.
90 WORKING WITH
This identification is done automatically if (and only if) the option (x) Auto
detect language (recomended) is checked. Otherwise the user is forcing
the application to use the comments of the selected language (indicator
arrow).
Selected code snippets involving more than one language will not be
commented/uncommented and a warning message is issued. That is, you
must select only the snippet of a single language.
Read below a brief description of available buttons (Figure 3.40):
Restore default:
Restores the file
Comments.xml
from the origin at (
InstallPath/data/data.zip
).
Any prior changes in the file
Comments.xml
currently being used will
be lost.
Edit: Places the table in edition mode.
Cancel current: Cancels any change made to the current edition.
Cancel all: Cancels all changes made to the database prior to Save.
Save:
Overwrites the text file (XML) saving all changes made to the current
table.
Close: Closes the dialog. All non-saved changes will be lost.
Card (R)
The card was based on two Rcards already published: R/Rpad Reference
Card by Tom Short and Rreference card by Jonathan Baron.
FIGURE 3.41: R card (Databases).
Read below a brief description of available buttons (Figure 3.41):
Restore default:
Restores the file
Rcard.xml
from the origin at (
InstallPath/data/data.zip
).
Any prior changes in the file
Rcard.xml
currently being used will be
lost.
New: Places the table in insertion mode.
Delete: Delete the current registry from the table.
Edit: Places the table in edition mode.
3.12. DATABASES 91
Cancel current: Cancels any change made to the current edition.
Cancel all: Cancels all changes made to the database prior to Save.
Save:
Overwrites the text file (XML) saving all changes made to the current
table.
Close: Closes the dialog. All non-saved changes will be lost.
Mirrors (R)
The Mirrors is an interface that allows the user to manage the repositories
(or mirrors) of R. You should always choose a repository physically closest
to where you are, so that, the Web communication tends to be faster and
more efficient.
The default mirror is the University Wien (Austria). Consider that this is
the central mirror of CRAN.
The reasons for the Tinn-R always set a repository are two:
•
Prevent Rkeep asking which repository you want to use in each
session;
•
Workaround of intermittency (only Rterm) display the dialog for
selecting the repository. That is, sometimes the dialog is displayed
and not others. The cause of this intermittency is still unknown.
FIGURE 3.42: R mirrors (Databases).
Read below a brief description of available buttons (Figure 3.42):
Restore default:
Restores the file
Rmirrors.xml
from the origin at (
InstallPath/data/data.zip
).
Any prior change to the file
Rmirrors.xml
while being used will be
lost.
New: Places the table in insertion mode.
Delete: Deletes the current registry from the table.
Edit: Places the table in edition mode.
Cancel current:
Cancels any change made during the current editing ses-
sion.
92 WORKING WITH
Cancel all: Cancels all changes made to the database prior to Save.
Save:
Overwrites the text file (XML) while saving all changes made to the
current table.
Close: Closes the dialog. All changes not previously saved will be lost.
3.13. REGULAR EXPRESSIONS 93
3.13 REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
This session is an adaptation. It is based on the help of the freewere PSPad
editor.
What are regular expressions?
Regular expressions are widely-used method to specify text patterns to
be searched for. Special metacharacters allow you to specify, for instance,
that a particular string you are looking for occurs at the beginning or end
of a line, or contains n recurrences of a certain character.
Regularexpressions may look ugly to novices, but are actually a very simple,
handy and powerful tool.
Simple Matches
Any single character matches itself, unless it is a metacharacter with a
special meaning described below.
A series of characters matches that series of characters in the target string,
so the pattern bluh would match bluh in the target string.
You can cause characters that normally function as metacharacters or
escape sequences to be interpreted literally by
escaping
them. Do this by
preceding them with a backslash
\
. For instance: metacharacter
ˆ
match
beginning of string, but \ˆmatch character ˆ,\\ match \and so on.
Examples:
ER Matches
foobar foobar
\ˆFooBarPtr ˆFooBarPtr
Escape Sequences
Characters may be specified using a escape sequences syntax much like
that used in C and Perl:
\n
matches a newline,
\t
a tab, etc. More generally,
\xnn
, where
nn
is a string of hexadecimal digits, matches the character
whose ASCII value is
nn
. If you need wide (Unicode) character code, you
can use
\x{nnnn}
, where
nnnn
is one or more hexadecimal (base 16) digits
(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F). Hex digit letters may be in upper or
lower case.
94 WORKING WITH
ER Description
\xnn Char with hex code nn
\x{nnnn}
Char with hex code
nnnn
(one byte for plain text and two
bytes for Unicode)
\tTab (HT/TAB), same as \x09
\nNewline (NL), same as \x0a
\rCarriage return (CR), same as \x0d
\fForm feed (FF), same as \x0c
\aAlarm (bell) (BEL), same as \x07
\eEscape (ESC), same as \x1b
Examples:
ER Matches
foo\x20bar foo bar (note space in the middle)
\tfoobar foobar predefined by tab
Character Classes
You can specify a character class by enclosing a list of characters in
[]
,
which will match any one character from the list. If the first character after
the [is ˆ, the class matches any character not in the list.
Examples:
ER Matches
foob[aeiou]r foobar,foober, etc. But not foobbr,foobcr, etc
foob[ˆaeiou]r foobbr,foobcr, etc. But not foobar,foober, etc
Within a list, the
-
character is used to specify a range, so that
a-z
repre-
sents all characters between aand z, inclusive.
If you want
-
itself to be a member of a class, put it at the start or end of
the list, or escape it with a backslash. If you want
]
you may place it at the
start of list or escape it with a backslash.
Examples:
ER Matches
[-az] a,zand -
[az-] a,zand -
[a\-z] a,zand -
[a-z] All twenty six small characters from ato z
[\n-\x0D] Any of ASCII #10(Lf),#11,#12(Ff),#13(Cr)
[\d-t] Any digit, -or t
[]-a] Any char from ]..a
3.13. REGULAR EXPRESSIONS 95
Metacharacters
Metacharacters are special characters which are the essence of regular
expressions. There are different types of metacharacters, described below.
Metacharacters - Line Separators:
ER Description
ˆStart of line
$End of line
\AStart of text
\ZEnd of text
.Any character in line
Examples:
ER Matches
ˆfoobar foobar only if it’s at the beginning of line
foobar$ foobar only if it’s at the end of line
ˆfoobar$ foobar only if it’s the only string in line
foob.r foobar,foobbr,foob1r and so on
The
ˆ
metacharacter by default is only guaranteed to match at the begin-
ning of the input string/text, the
$
metacharacter only at the end. Embed-
ded line separators will not be matched by
ˆ
or
$
. You may, however, wish
to treat a string as a multi-line buffer, such that the
ˆ
will match after any
line separator within the string, and
$
will match before any line separator.
You can do this by switching the modifier /m on.
The
\A
and
\Z
are just like
ˆ
and
$
, except that they won’t match multiple
times when the modifier
/m
is used, while
ˆ
and
$
will match at every
internal line separator.
Metacharacters - Predefined Classes:
ER Description
\wAn alphanumeric character (including _)
\WA non alphanumeric character
\dA numeric character
\DA non-numeric character
\sAny space (same as [\t\n\r\f])
\SA non space
You may use \w, \d and \s within custom character classes.
96 WORKING WITH
Examples:
ER Matches
foob\dr foob1r,foob6r and so on but not foobar,foobbr and so on
foob[\w\s]r foobar
,
foob r
,
foobbr
and so on but not
foob1r
,
foob=r
and so on
TRegExpr uses properties SpaceChars and WordChars to define character
classes \w,\W,\s,\S, so you can easily redefine it.
Metacharacters - Word Boundaries:
ER Matches
\bA word boundary
\BA non-(word boundary)
A word boundary
\b
is a spot between two characters that has a
\w
on one
side of it and a
\W
on the other side of it (in either order), counting the
imaginary characters of the beginning and end of the string as matching
a\W.
Metacharacters - Iterators:
Any item of a regular expression may be followed by another type of
metacharacters - iterators. Using this metacharacters you can specify
number of occurrences of the previous character, metacharacter or subex-
pression.
ER Matches
*Zero or more ("greedy"), similar to {0,}
+One or more ("greedy"), similar to {1,}
?Zero or one ("greedy"), similar to {0,1}
{n} Exactly n times ("greedy")
{n,} At least n times ("greedy")
{n,m} At least n but not more than m times ("greedy")
*?At least n but not more than m times ("greedy")
+? At least n but not more than m times ("greedy")
?? Zero or one ("non-greedy"), similar to {0,1}?
{n}? Exactly n times ("non-greedy")
{n,}? At least n times ("non-greedy")
{n,m}? At least n but not more than m times ("non-greedy")
So, digits in curly brackets of the form
{n,m}
, specify the minimum num-
ber of times to match the item n and the maximum m. The form
{n}
is
equivalent to
{n,n}
and matches exactly n times. The form
{n,}
matches
n or more times. There is no limit to the size of n or m, but large numbers
will chew up more memory and slow down r.e. execution.
If a curly bracket occurs in any other context, it is treated as a regular
character.
3.13. REGULAR EXPRESSIONS 97
Examples:
ER Matches
foob.*r foobar,foobalkjdflkj9r and foobr
foob.+r foobar,foobalkjdflkj9r but not foobr
foob.?r foobar,foobbr and foobr but not foobalkj9r
fooba{2}r foobaar
fooba{2,}r foobaar,foobaaar,foobaaaar, ...
fooba{2,3}r foobaar, or foobaaar but not foobaaaar
A little explanation about
greediness
.
Greedy
takes as many as possi-
ble,
non-greedy
takes as few as possible. For example,
b+
and
b*
applied
to string
abbbbc
return
bbbb
,
b+?
returns
b
,
b*?
returns empty string,
b{2,3}? returns bb,b{2,3} returns bbb.
Metacharacters - Alternatives:
You can specify a series of alternatives for a pattern using
|
to separate
them, so that fee
|
fie
|
foe will match any of
fee
,
fie
, or
foe
in the target
string (as would f(e
|
i
|
o)e). The first alternative includes everything from
the last pattern delimiter ((,[, or the beginning of the pattern) up to the
first
|
, and the last alternative contains everything from the last
|
to the
next pattern delimiter. For this reason, it’s common practice to include
alternatives in parentheses, to minimize confusion about where they start
and end.
Alternatives are tried from left to right, so the first alternative found for
which the entire expression matches, is the one that is chosen. This means
that alternatives are not necessarily greedy. For example: when matching
foo
|
foot against
barefoot
, only the
foo
part will match, as that is the first
alternative tried, and it successfully matches the target string. (This might
not seem important, but it is important when you are capturing matched
text using parentheses).
Also remember that
|
is interpreted as a literal within square brackets, so
if you write [fee|fie|foe]. You’re really only matching [feio|].
Examples:
ER Matches
foo(bar|foo) foobar or foofoo
Metacharacters - Subexpressions:
The bracketing construct ( ... ) may also be used to define r.e. subexpres-
sions (after parsing, you can find subexpression positions, lengths and
actual values in MatchPos, MatchLen and Match properties of TRegExpr,
98 WORKING WITH
and substitute it in clip strings by TRegExpr.Substitute).
Subexpressions are numbered based on the left to right order of their
opening parenthesis. First subexpression has number
1
(whole r.e. match
has number
0
- you can substitute it in TRegExpr. Substitute as
$0
or
$&
).
Examples:
ER Matches
(foobar){8,10} Strings which contain 8, 9 or 10 instances of the foobar
foob([0-9]|a+)r foob0r,foob1r ,foobar,foobaar,foobaar, ...
(abc(def)ghi(123))xzy abcdefghi123xyz (the only match)
Then backreferences:
ER Description
\1 = abcdefghi123
\2 =def
\3 =123
\0 =abcdefghi123xyz (the whole match)
We could find the same string using metacharacterIterators with: (
\w{3}([d-
f]{3})...(\d*))xyz
and the backreferences would have the same val-
ues. And yet the pattern would also match:
123fdd@#$4444xyz
,
bbbeee-
abc1234567xyz,ddddddaaaxyz.
Metacharacters - Backreferences:
Metacharacters
\1
through
\9
are interpreted as backreferences in the
Search text box. When used outside of the regular expression, such as in
the Replace text field, metacharacters
$1
through
$9
are interpreted as
backreferences to the last find.
\<n>matches previously matched subexpression #<n>.
Find Examples:
ER Matches
(.)\1+ aaaa and cc
(.+)\1+ abab and 123123
([’"]?)(\d+)\1 "13"
(in double quotes), or
’4’
(in single quotes) or
77
(with-
out quotes), ...
Replace Examples:
Date format change from
dd.mm.yyyy
to
yyyy-mm-dd
.
This will turn the European date style
26.8.1994
or
26/8/1994
into
1994-8-26
. Search:
([0-9]{1,2}).([0-9]{1,2}).([0-9]{4})
Replace:
$3-$2-$1 Make sure you check the box for Regular Expression.
3.13. REGULAR EXPRESSIONS 99
Regular Expression Tutorials
The following is a list of a few sites that contain tutorials on both regular
expressions in general and their use in specific languages:
•General Tutorial
•Regular Expressions - User guide
•Regular Expression HOWTO
•Perl Regular Expressions
•Regular Expression Basic Syntax Reference
CHAPTER 4
MENU DESCRIPTION
This chapter provides information about the main menu for Tinn-R.
101
102 MENU DESCRIPTION
4.1 FILE
Option Description
New Creates a new file
Template See options ...
Open Opens selected file as text
Open all recent files Opens all files from the Most Recently Used (MRU) file list
Recent files Displays a Most Recently Used (MRU) file list. Selecting one of
the displayed files will open that file
Reload Reloads the current files to the last saved status
Save Saves the current file. If the file has not been previously saved
then the ’File Save As’ dialog will open first
Save as Saves the current file with a new name
Save all Saves all changed files. If a file has not been previously saved
the ’File Save As’ dialog will open first
Close Closes the current file. If the file has not been saved you will be
prompted to save it
Close all Closes all files including projects
Print Will open a Tinn-R dialog allowing settings and actions associ-
ated with the current file
Copy full path to clipboard See options ...
Exit Exits the application
Template
Option Description
R script Creates a R script template
R doc See options ...
R html Creates a R html template
R markdown Creates a R markdown template
R noweb Creates a R noweb template
4.1. FILE 103
R doc
Option Description
Function Creates a R doc function template
Dataset Creates a R doc dataset template
Empty Creates a R doc empty template
Copy full path to clipboard
Option Description
Unix mode ../.. Copy full path of current file to clipboard in Unix mode ../..
Windows mode ..\.. Copy full path of current file to clipboard Windows mode ..\..
104 MENU DESCRIPTION
4.2 PROJECT
Option Description
Project See options ...
Group(s) See options ...
File(s) See options ...
Recent The option will display a Most Recently Used (MRU) project file list.
Selecting one of the displayed files will open that file
Edit (as text file) Opens the textual description of the project for editing
Reload (from text file) Reloads the graphical project interface from the textual description
of the project
Project
Option Description
New Creates new project. If you have an open unsaved project you will be
prompted to save the project file
Open Opens existing project and restores the project’s state
Open demo Opens existing demo project and restores the project’s state
Save Saves the project file
Save as Saves the current file with a new name
Close project This option will close any files that are in a virtual folder
Delete current This option will delete the virtual folder of the current project
4.2. PROJECT 105
Group(s)
Option Description
New Creates a new group of current project
Rename Renames a selected group of current project
Delete current Removes the selected group from the current project
Delete all Removes all groups from the current project
Expand all Expands all groups of the current project in the graphical interface
Collapse all Collapses all groups of the current project in the graphical interface
File(s)
Option Description
Open all (project) Opens all files of a project
Close all (project) Closes all files of a project
Open all (selected group) Opens all files of a selected group
Close all (selected group) Closes all files of a selected group
Add Opens the windows interface to select file(s) and add the se-
lected(s) files to a selected group
Add current Add the current file to the selected group
Remove all (project) Removes all files from the project
Remove all (selected group) Removes all files from the selected group
Remove Removes selected file
Copy full path to clipboard Copies the full path of selected files to the clipboard
106 MENU DESCRIPTION
4.3 EDIT
Option Description
Undo Undoes the last action
Redo Re-applies any actions undone using the Undo option
Copy Copies the selected text and places it in the Windows clip-
board
Cut Cuts the selected text and places it in the Windows clipboard
Paste Places any text in the Windows clipboard at position indi-
cated by the cursor within the file
Copy formatted (to export) See options ...
Select all Selects the whole text contained in the file
Comment Adds comments to selected line(s)
Uncomment firsts occurrence Removes the first occurrence from a comment in the se-
lected line(s)
Uncomment all occurrence Removes all occurrences from a comment in the selected
line(s)
Copy formatted (to export)
Option Description
RTF Copies the selected text and places it in the Windows clipboard in Rtf
format
HTML Copies the selected text and places it in the Windows clipboard in Html
format
TeX Copies the selected text and places it in the Windows clipboard in TeX
format
4.4. FORMAT 107
4.4 FORMAT
Option Description
Selection See options ...
Word See options ...
Format R (file or selection) Reformat a whole file or selection by using formatR package
Encoding See options ...
EOL (line ending) See options ...
UTF-8 (special case) See options ...
Selection
Option Description
Indent Indents selected line(s)
Unindent Unindents selected line(s)
Uppercase selection Converts selected text into upper case
Lowercase selection Converts selected text into lower case
Invert selection Inverts the case of all selected text
Word
Option Description
Uppercase word Converts the word under the cursor to upper case
Lowercase word Converts the word under the cursor to lower case
Invert case Inverts the case of the word under the cursor
108 MENU DESCRIPTION
Encoding
Option Description
Default (new files) See options ...
Convert (current to) See options ...
Default (new files)
Option Description
ANSI Sets encoding to ANSI
UTF-8 Sets encoding to UTF-8
UTF16-LE Sets encoding to UTF16-LE
UTF16-BE Sets encoding to UTF16-BE
Convert (current to)
Option Description
ANSI Converts current encoding to ANSI
UTF-8 Converts current encoding to UTF-8
UTF16-LE Converts current encoding to UTF16-LE
UTF16-BE Converts current encoding to UTF16-BE
EOL (line ending)
Option Description
Default (new files) See options ...
Convert (current to) See options ...
4.4. FORMAT 109
Default (new files)
Option Description
WIN (CR+LF) WIN (CR+LF)
MAC (CR) MAC (CR)
UNIX (LF) UNIX (LF)
Convert (current to)
Option Description
WIN (CR+LF) Convert to WIN (CR+LF)
MAC (CR) Convert to MAC (CR)
UNIX (LF) Convert to UNIX (LF)
UTF-8 (special case)
Option Description
Apply to open ANSI files ANSI files without any special characters it will be always
reconized as UTF-8 encoding
Always add the BOM When saving it will be always added the BOM
110 MENU DESCRIPTION
4.5 MARKS
Option Description
Block See options ...
Unmark all Unmarks all marks of the current file
Block
Option Description
Mark Marks selected block: 0 to begin and 1 to end
Unmark Unmarks any previous marked block. It is not necessary to select the marked
block
4.6. INSERT 111
4.6 INSERT
Option Description
R (assignment) See options ...
LaTeX See options ...
Completion Insert the completion
Date /Time stamp Inserts the current system time and date
R (assignment)
Option Description
<- Insert left assignment
->Insert right assignment
Latex
Option Description
Math See options ...
Header See options ...
Format See options ...
Font See options ...
Math
112 MENU DESCRIPTION
Option Description
Dimensional Opens a dialog box to insert a dimensional element: Array, Matrix, Tabular or
Tabbing
frac{}{} Inserts frac{}{}. If there are two selected elements, for example 1 2, it will
place both elements in the correct position, i.e, frac{1}{2}
sqrt{} Inserts sqrt{}. If an element is selected, say 9, it will place this element in the
correct position, i.e, sqrt{9}
sqrt[]{} Inserts sqrt[]{}. If there are two selected elements, for example 3 27, it will
place both in the correct position, i.e, sqrt[3]{27}
4.6. INSERT 113
Header
Option Description
Part Inserts \part{} if no selection or \part{selected}
Chapter Inserts \chapter{} if no selection or \chapter{selected}
Section Inserts \section{} if no selection or \section{selected}
Sub-section Inserts \subsection{} if no selection or \subsection{selected}
Sub-sub-section Inserts \subsubsection{} if no selection or \subsubsection{selected}
Paragraph Inserts \paragraph{} if no selection or \paragraph{selected}
Sub-paragraph Inserts \subparagraph{} if no selection or \subparagraph{selected}
Format
Option Description
Itemization Inserts itemization or itemizes a selection
Enumeration Inserts enumeration or enumerates a selection
Left Inserts tag to align the text on the left or to align the selection on the left
Center Inserts tag to align the text on the center or to centralize the selection
Right Inserts tag to align the text right or to align the selection on the right
114 MENU DESCRIPTION
Font
Option Description
Enphase Inserts \emph{} if no selection or \emph{selected}
Bold Inserts \textbf{} if no selection or \textbf{selected}
Italic Inserts \textit{} if no selection or \textit{selected}
Slatend Inserts \textsl{} if no selection or \textsl{selected}
Typewriter Inserts \texttt{} if no selection or \texttt{selected}
Small caps Inserts \textsc{} if no selection or \textsc{selected}
Tiny Inserts {\tiny {}} if no selection or {\tiny {selected}}
Script size Inserts {\scriptsize {}} if no selection or {\scriptsize {selected}}
Footnote size Inserts {\footnotesize {}} if no selection or {\footnotesize {selected}}
Small Inserts {\small {}} if no selection or {\small {selected}}
Normal Inserts {\normalsize {}} if no selection or {\normalsize {selected}}
Large Inserts {\large {}} if no selection or {\large {selected}}
Larger Inserts {\Large {}} if no selection or {\Large {selected}}
Largest Inserts {\LARGE {}} if no selection or {\LARGE {selected}}
Huge Inserts {\huge {}} if no selection or {\huge {selected}}
Huger Inserts {\Huge {}} if no selection or {\Huge {selected}}
4.7. SEARCH 115
4.7 SEARCH
Option Description
Find Opens the Find dialog
Find again Uses the previously entered search criteria to find the next occurrence, i.e,
one closer to the end of the file. This option is not available if a search has
not been carried out.
Search in files Opens the Search in files dialog
Replace Opens the Replace dialog
Go to This option produces the dialog below and allows you to move the cursor to
the specified position
116 MENU DESCRIPTION
4.8 OPTIONS
Option Description
Application Opens the Application options dialog
Shortcuts Opens the Shortcuts customization dialog
Highlighters (settings) Opens the Highlighters (settings) dialog
Syntax (highlighters) See options ...
File (open maximized) When this option is set all files will be opened maximized
R echo (on/off) Toggles R echo option (file, selection, clipboard, block, contiguous
and lines to end page)
Rgui focus (return to editor) When this option is set the focus will go back to the active editor
after any Send or Control action
On top Toggles Tinn-R’s ability to be the topmost window on the desktop
Read only Toggles file read-only status. When set as read-only the file name
on the file tab is among <...>
Auto completion Toggles auto completion resource
Enable notification Toggles file notification resource
Update silenty Toggles update silenty resource
Selection mode See options ...
Syntax (highlighter)
Option Description
Set See options ...
Default (to new files) See options ...
4.8. OPTIONS 117
Set
Option Description
All File without extension or not recognized extension
Assembly x86 x86 Assembly files
Bath MS_DOS MS_DOS Bath files
C# C# files
C/C++ C/C++ files
CSS Cascading SS files
Fortran Fortran files
Haskell Haskell files
HTML Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) files
HTML complex Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) complex (HTML & JavaScript) files
INI INI files
Java Java files
JavaScript JavaScript files
Object Pascal Pascal files
Perl Perl files
PHP PHP files
PHP complex PHP (HTML & JavaScript & PHP) complex files
Python Python files
R R files
R complex R complex (R & URI) files
R doc Rd files
R html Rhtml files
R markdown Rmd files
R noweb R noweb (TeX & R) files
Ruby Ruby files
SQL SQL files
Structured Text Structured Text files
TclTk TclTk files
TeX TeX files
Text Text files
URI Uniform Resource Identifiers (URI) files
MS VBScript MS VBScript files
Visual Basic Visual Basic files
XML XML files
If necessary select manually one of the list. Tinn-R recognizes automati-
cally the syntax based on the file extensions.
118 MENU DESCRIPTION
Default (to new files)
Option Description
R When this option is set the highlighter of all new files will be set as R
R complex When this option is set the highlighter of all new files will be set as R complex
Text When this option is set the highlighter of all new files will be set as Text
Selection mode
Option Description
Normal See selection type normal ...
Line See selection type line ...
Column See selection type column ...
4.9. TOOLS 119
4.9 TOOLS
Option Description
Processing See options ...
Database See options ...
Backup See options ...
Restore See options ...
Macro See options ...
ASCII chart Allows you to insert an active char to the active document
Differences Opens the nice TextDiff command by Angus Johnson integrated within Tinn-
R
Spell Starts the speller (see instructions ...)
Sort See options ...
Count Shows the result of the count action (words, characters +spaces, character -
spaces and spaces) for files or a text selection
Match bracket Search for matching bracket. See details below
How to match:
The cursor must be placed immediately before any of the
bracket characters. When this option is called the cursor will move
to the point immediately before the matching bracket.
Recognized brackets: The bracket characters are (), [] and {}.
Processing
Option Description
Conversion See options ...
Compilation (LaTeX) See options ...
Viewer See options ...
120 MENU DESCRIPTION
Conversion
Option Description
Deplate to See options ...
Pandoc See options ...
Txt2tags to See options ...
Deplate to
Option Description
LaTeX Converts a Deplate file to LaTeX
LaYeX-dramatist Converts a Deplate file to LaTeX-dramatist
Sweave Converts a Deplate file to Sweave
Plain Converts a Deplate file to Plain
HTML Converts a Deplate file to HTML
HTML site Converts a Deplate file to HTML site
HTML slides Converts a Deplate file to HTML slides
XHTML 1.0 transitional (xhtml10t) Converts a Deplate file to XHTML 1.0 transitional
XHTML 1.1 with MathML (xhtml11m) Converts a Deplate file to XHTML 1.1 with
MathML
PHP Converts a Deplate file to PHP
Dbk-article Converts a Deplate file to Dbk-article
Dbk-book Converts a Deplate file to Dbk-book
Dbk-ref Converts a Deplate file to Dbk-ref
Tip: see details ...
4.9. TOOLS 121
Pandoc
Tip: see details ...
122 MENU DESCRIPTION
Txt2tags to
Option Description
LaTeX Converts a Txt2tags file into LaTeX
Sweave Converts a Txt2tags file into Sweave
Txt Converts a Txt2tags file into txt
HTML Converts a Txt2tags file into HTML
XHTML Converts a Txt2tags file into XHTML
SGML Converts a Txt2tags file into SGML
Lout Converts a Txt2tags file into Lout
Man page Converts a Txt2tags file into Man page
Wikipedia Converts a Txt2tags file into Wikipedia
Google code wiki Converts a Txt2tags file into Google code wiki
Doku wiki Converts a Txt2tags file into Doku wiki
Moinmoin Converts a Txt2tags file into Moinmoin
Magic point Converts a Txt2tags file into Magic point
Page maker Converts a Txt2tags file into Page maker
Tip: see details ...
Compilation (LaTeX)
Option Description
Always shows console minimized
when compiling
When this option is set the DOS console will be mini-
mized when compiling
DVI (single) Compiles a LaTeX file to DVI in single way
DVI (bibtex) Compiles a LaTeX file to DVI in bibtex way (three com-
pilation)
PDF (single) Compiles a LaTeX file to PDF in single way
PDF (bibtex) Compiles a LaTeX file to PDF in bibtex way (three com-
pilation)
Make index (makeindex)
4.9. TOOLS 123
Viewer
Option Description
DVI See options ...
PDF See options ...
HTML See options ...
Open current file (generic)
DVI
Option Description
Open always after compilation (option) When this option is set the DVI file will be
opened by the viewer after the compilation
Open file Shows the Windows Open dialog to select a
DVI file to be opened by the viewer
PDF
Option Description
Open always after compilation (option) When this option is set the PDF file will be
opened by the viewer after the compilation
Open file Shows the Windows Open dialog to select a
DVI file to be opened by the viewer
HTML
Option Description
Open always after conversion (option) When this option is set the HTML file will be
opened by the viewer after the conversion
Open current file Opens the current HTML file with the viewer
Open file Shows the Windows Open dialog to select a
HTML file to be opened by the viewer
124 MENU DESCRIPTION
Database
Option Description
Shortcuts Shows Shortcuts database (XML based) dialog
Completion Shows Completion database (XML based) dialog
Comments Shows Comments database (XML based) dialog
Card (R) Shows R card database (XML based) dialog
Mirrors (R) Shows R mirrors database (XML based) dialog
Backup
Option Description
System configuration Backups Tinn-R configuration (ini files)
Database Backups database (Cachexml, Comments.xml, Completions.xml,
Rcard.xml, Rmirrors.xml and Shortcuts.xml)
Restore
Option Description
System configuration Restores a prior Tinn-R backup (ini files)
Database Restores a prior database backup (Cachexml, Comments.xml, Com-
pletions.xml, Rcard.xml, Rmirrors.xml and Shortcuts.xml)
Macro
Option Description
Record Toggles macro recording on and off. Note that when recording a
macro the button changes
Play Plays a previous recorded macro
It is not possible to save/edit macros, they are temporary
4.9. TOOLS 125
Sort
Option Description
Strings Sorts strings
Numbers Sorts numbers
Dates Sorts dates
Sort works on the entire document unless some text is selected
126 MENU DESCRIPTION
4.10 R
Option Description
Set .trPaths (temporarily) Sets (temporarily) the necessary .trPaths object in Ren-
vironment This object provided by TinnRcom package.
This option is useful only if the user can not, for some
reason, install the TinnRcom package
Get info (R and TinnRcom) Get information about Rand the necessary TinnRcom
package
Update mirrors Updates the Rmirrors.xml file
Rterm See options ...
Send See options ...
Control See options ...
Hotkeys (operational system) Shows Tinn-R hotkeys (related with the operational
system) dialog. See Hotkeys (operational system) ...
Start/close and connections
Option Description
Rterm (start/close) Starts and Closes Rterm interface
Rgui (start/close) Starts and Closes Rgui application
Server (connections and tests) Opens the dialog R server: connections and tests
Tip: the Server (connections and tests) dialog allows you to test the TCP/IP
communication protocols used to establish a communication between R
and Tinn-R.
4.10. R 127
Rterm
Option Description
Rterm (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Rterm interface
File See options ...
Clear See options ...
Focus See options ...
Size See options ...
Split See options ...
Highlighter See options ...
Line wrap See options ...
History See options ...
Workspace See options ...
Font of active control (not permanent) See options ...
File
Option Description
IO See options ...
LOG See options ...
File IO
Option Description
Save Saves the content of the IO interface
Save as Saves the content of the IO interface as a new file
Print Opens the Tinn-R print dialog with the content from the IO inter-
face
128 MENU DESCRIPTION
File LOG
Option Description
Save Saves the content of the LOG interface
Save as Saves as the content of the LOG interface
Print Opens the Tinn-R print dialog with content from LOG interface
Clear
Option Description
IO Clear IO
LOG Clear LOG
IO and LOG Clear IO and LOG
Focus
Option Description
Editor Places the focus inside of the editor
IO Places the focus inside of the IO
LOG Places the focus inside of the LOG
Size
Option Description
Rterm (maximize) Maximizes the Rterm interface
Rterm (divide) Divides the Rterm interface
Rterm (minimize) Minimizes the Rterm interface
4.10. R 129
Split
Option Description
Horizontal split (IO and LOG in the same view) Splits horizontally the Rterm interface placing IO and LOG on the
same view
Vertical split (IO and LOG in the same view) Splits vertically the Rterm interface placing IO and LOG on the same
view
Remove split (IO and LOG in distinct view) Removes split placing IO and LOG in distinct view
Highlighter
Option Description
IO See options ...
LOG See options ...
Highlighter IO
Option Description
Text Sets the IO highlighter to Text
Text (no multline string) Sets the IO highlighter to Text without string multline suport
R Sets the IO highlighter to R
R (no multline string) Sets the IO highlighter to R without string multline suport
Highlighter LOG
Option Description
Text Sets the LOG highlighter to Text
Text (no multline string) Sets the LOG highlighter to Text without string multline suport
R Sets the LOG highlighter to R
R (no multline string) Sets the LOG highlighter to R without string multline suport
130 MENU DESCRIPTION
Line wrap
Option Description
IO Sets line wrap to IO
LOG Sets line wrap to LOG
History
Option Description
Save Saves the history
Load Loads the history
Prior Prior section of the history
Next Next section of the history
Workspace
Option Description
Save Saves the workspace
Load Loads the workspace
Font of active control (not permanent)
Option Description
Increase Increase the font size
Decrease Decrease the font size
4.10. R 131
Send
Option Description
File Sends current file to R interpreter
Selection Sends current selection to R interpreter
Clipboard Sends the clipboard content to R interpreter
Marked block Sends current marked block to R interpreter
Contiguous Sends contiguous lines to R interpreter
Smart Sends complete instruction blocks when the cursor is
located in a complex context
Line Sends current line to R interpreter echoing it
Lines to end page Sends all visible lines to end page echoing it
Cursor to beginning line Sends cursor position to beginning line
Cursor to end line Sends cursor position to end line
Sweave Sends to R interpreter Sweave(’Active file’) in-
struction
Knitr See options ...
Knitr
Option Description
Knit to LaTeX (Rnw) Knit the *.Rnw file to L
A
T
EX
Knit to HTML (Rmd, Rhtml) Knit the *.Rmd or *.Rhtml file to HTML
132 MENU DESCRIPTION
Control
Option Description
Set work directory (current file path) Sets the work directory of the R interpreter to the current file path
List all objects Sends to R interpreter a ls() instruction
Print content (selected) Sends to R interpreter a selected word
List names (selected) Sends to R interpreter a names(selected) instruction
List structure (selected) Sends to R interpreter a str(selected) instruction
Edit (selected) Sends to R interpreter a edit(selected) instruction
Fix (selected) Sends to R interpreter a fix(selected) instruction
Plot (selected) Sends to R interpreter a plot(selected) instruction
Clear console Sends and executes the virtual CTRL + L (clear screen) instruction
Close all graphic devices Sends to R interpreter a graphics.off() instruction
Remove all objects Sends to R interpreter a rm(list=ls()) instruction
Clear all Sends to R interpreter a graphics.off();rm(list=ls()) CTRL + L instructions
Escape Stops all computations in Rgui
Help (selected) Sends to R interpreter a help(selected) instruction
Example (selected) Sends to R interpreter a example(selected) instruction
Open example (selected) Sends to R interpreter an instruction to generate an example text file of the object
selected
Help Sends to R interpreter a help.start(update=FALSE) instruction
Packages See options ...
TCP/IP connection Sends to R interpreter an instruction to start: startSocket-
Server(port=portnumber) or stop: startSocketServer(port=portnumber)
the TCP/IP connection
4.10. R 133
Packages
Option Description
Install Sends to R interpreter an utils:::menuInstallPkgs() instruction
Install (from local zip) Sends to R interpreter a utils:::menuInstallLocal() instruction
Install (TinnRcom) Sends to R interpreter instruction to install TinnRcom package and its dependecies. By default it
is not necessary since the TinnRcom package is automatically installed
Load (TinnRcom) Sends to R interpreter an library(TinnRcom) instruction. By default it is not necessary since the
TinnRcom package is automatically loaded when R starts
Installed Sends to R interpreter a installed.packages() instruction
Load Sends to R interpreter a local({pkg <- select.list(sort(.packages(all.available =
TRUE))); if(nchar(pkg)) library(pkg, character.only=TRUE)}) instruction
New Sends to R interpreter a new.packages() instruction
Remove Sends to R interpreter a local({pkg <- select.list(sort(.packages(all.available =
TRUE))); if(nchar(pkg)) remove.packages(pkg)}) instruction
Update Sends to R interpreter an update.packages(ask=’graphics’) instruction
Status Sends to R interpreter a packageStatus() instruction
134 MENU DESCRIPTION
4.11 VIEW
Option Description
RSee options ...
Tools See options ...
Toolsbar See options ...
Tabs See options ...
Organize screen (Tinn-R/Rgui) Organizes the screen (Tinn-R and Rgui) ac-
cording to the user set. See options ...
Tools (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Tools interface
Tools (maximize) Maximizes the Tools interface
Tools (divide) Divides the Tools interface
Tools (minimize) Minimizes the Tools interface
Rterm (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Rterm interface
Rterm (maximize) Maximizes the Rterm interface
Rterm (divide) Splits the Rterm interface
Rterm (minimize) Minimizes the Rterm interface
Line wrap (show/hide) See options ...
Gutter (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) gutter
Line numbers (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) line numbers
Special characters (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) special characters
Status bar (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) status bar
Split See options ...
Font of active control (not permanent) See options ...
R
Option Description
Organize screen (Tinn-R/Rgui) Organizes the screen (Tinn-R and Rgui) according to
the user set. See options ...
Rterm See options ...
4.11. VIEW 135
Rterm
Option Description
Rterm (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Rterm interface
Size See options ...
Split See options ...
Highlighter See options ...
Line wrap See options ...
Font of active control (not permanent) See options ...
Size
Option Description
Rterm (maximize) Maximizes the Rterm interface
Rterm (divide) Splits the Rterm interface
Rterm (minimize) Minimizes the Rterm interface
Split
Option Description
Horizontal split (IO and LOG in the same view) Horizontally splits the Rterm inter-
face placing IO and LOG in the same
view
Vertical split (IO and LOG in the same view) Vertically splits the Rterm interface
placing IO and LOG in the same
view
Remove split (IO and LOG in distinct view) Removes split placing IO and LOG
in distinct view
136 MENU DESCRIPTION
Highlighter
Option Description
IO See options ...
LOG See options ...
Highlighter IO
Option Description
Text Sets the IO highlighter to Text
Text (no multline string) Sets the IO highlighter to Text without string multline suport
R Sets the IO highlighter to R
R (no multline string) Sets the IO highlighter to R without string multline suport
Highlighter LOG
Option Description
Text Sets the LOG highlighter to Text
Text (no multline string) Sets the LOG highlighter to Text without string multline suport
R Sets the LOG highlighter to R
R (no multline string) Sets the LOG highlighter to R without string multline suport
Line wrap
Option Description
IO Sets Line wrap to IO
LOG Sets Line wrap to LOG
Font of active control (not permanent)
4.11. VIEW 137
Option Description
Increase Increase font size
Decrease Decrease font size
Tools
Option Description
Tools (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Tools interface
Size See options ...
Resources See options ...
Size
Option Description
Tools (maximize) Maximizes the Tools interface
Tools (divide) Divides the Tools interface
Tools (minimize) Minimizes the Tools interface
Resources
Option Description
Misc See options ...
Markup See options ...
Results See options ...
Shortcuts (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Shortcuts tab of Tools interface
Spell (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Spell tab of Tools interface
Database See options ...
RSee options ...
138 MENU DESCRIPTION
Misc
Option Description
Misc (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Misc tab of Tools interface
Windows expl. (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Windows expl. tab of Misc
Work expl. (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Work expl. tab of Misc
Project (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Project tab of Misc
Markup
Option Description
Markup (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Markup tab of Tools interface
Txt2tags (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Txt2tags tab of Markup
LaTeX (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) LaTeX tab of Markup
Results
Option Description
Results (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Results tab of Tools interface
Ini lOG (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Ini lOG tab of Results
Search (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Search tab of Results
Database
Option Description
Database (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Database tab of Tools interface
Shortcuts (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Shortcuts tab of Database
Completion (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Completion tab of Database
Comments (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Comments tab of Database
4.11. VIEW 139
R
Option Description
R (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Rtab of Tools interface
Explorer (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Explorer tab of R
Card (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Rcard tab of Database
Mirrors (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) R mirrors tab of Database
Toolbars
Option Description
All bars (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) All bars tab of Tools bar interface
Edit (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Edit tab of Tools bar interface
File (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) File tab of Tools bar interface
Filter (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Filter tab of Tools bar interface
Format (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Format tab of Tools bar interface
Macro (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Macro tab of Tools bar interface
Misc (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Misc tab of Tools bar interface
Processing (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Processing tab of Tools bar interface
R (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Rtab of Tools bar interface
Search (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Search tab of Tools bar interface
Spell (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Spell tab of Tools bar interface
Syntax (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Syntax tab of Tools bar interface
View (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) View tab of Tools bar interface
Tabs
Option Description
Files See options ...
Tools See options ...
Rterm See options ...
140 MENU DESCRIPTION
Files
Option Description
Tabs (show/hide) Toogles(show/hide) the main Tabs
Top Shows the main Tabs on top
Bottom Shows the main Tabs on bottom
Tools
Option Description
Left Shows the Tools Tabs on left
Top Shows the Tools Tabs on top
Right Shows the Tools Tabs on right
Bottom Shows the Tools Tabs on bottom
Rterm
Option Description
Left Shows the Rterm Tabs on left
Top Shows the Rterm Tabs on top
Right Shows the Rterm Tabs on right
Bottom Shows the Rterm Tabs on bottom
Line wrap
Option Description
Editor (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Editor line wrap
Rterm/IO (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Rterm/IO line wrap
Rterm/LOG (show/hide) Toggles (show/hide) Rterm/LOG line wrap
4.11. VIEW 141
Split
Option Description
Horizontal Horizontally splits the editor
Vertical Vertically splits the editor
Remove Removes split
Font of active control (not permanent)
Option Description
Increase Increase font size
Decrease Decrease font size
142 MENU DESCRIPTION
4.12 WINDOW
Option Description
Tile vertically Shows two views of the same file tiled vertically, to the left and right.
Each can be scrolled independently
Tile horizontally Shows two views of the same file tiled horizontally, one above the
other. Each can be scrolled independently
Minimize all Minimizes all windows (editor)
Cascade The windows cascade from the upper left to the lower right of the
workspace
Arrange icons Windows are tiled horizontally, but the active document comes on
top. You may also drag your document tabs to the order you prefer
and then tile them horizontally
Files opened If many files are opened, a dialog will be open to select a file
4.13. WEB 143
4.13 WEB
Option Description
R (search) See options ...
R (information) See options ...
R (Editors, GUIs and IDEs) See options ...
Statistics See options ...
Processing See options ...
R (search)
Option Description
Selected text See options ...
Help for R (Jonathan Baron) Opens URL Help for R
Mailing list archives Opens URL R mailing lists archive
Nabble See options ...
R-help mailing list information Opens URL r-help
RSeek Opens URL R Seek
Site search Opens URL R Site Search
Selected text
Option Description
Google Opens URL Google and lists the results associated with the word
under the cursor or selected text
Site search Opens URL R Site Search and lists the results associated with the
word under the cursor or selected text
144 MENU DESCRIPTION
Nabble
Option Description
R forum Opens URL R forum
R-br forum Opens URL R-br forum
R (information)
Option Description
Bioconductor Opens URL Bioconductor project
CRAN Opens URL The Comprehensive R Archive Network
MRAN Opens URL Microsoft R Application Network
News Opens URL R News
Omega Opens URL The Omega Project for Statistical Computing
Task views Opens URL CRAN Task Views
Web site Opens URL The R Project for Statistical Computing
Statistical with R Opens URL Statistical with R
R tutorial Opens URL R tutorial
R (Editors, Gui’s and IDEs)
Option Description
R Comander Opens URL The R Commander: A Basic-Statistics GUI for R
RStudio Opens URL RStudio
RTVS Opens URL R Tools for Visual Studio
ESS Opens URL Emacs Speaks Statistics (ESS)
Nvim-R Opens URL Nvim-R: Plugin to work with R
Tinn-R See options ...
4.13. WEB 145
Tinn-R
Option Description
Web page Opens URL Web page of Tinn-R project
SourceForge (repository) Opens URL Sourceforge.net Tinn-R
SciViews (old web page) Opens URL SciViews Tinn-R
Statistics
Option Description
Virtual laboratories See options ...
Electronic Textbook StatSoft Opens URL Electronic Textbook StatSoft
HyperStat Text Book Opens URL HyperStat Text Book
JSS Opens URL Journal of Statistical Software
R Journal Opens URL R Journal
Virtual laboratories
Option Description
Rice Opens URL Rice Virtual Lab in Statistics
Statistical Java Opens URL Statistical Java
VESTAC Opens URL Java Applets for Visualization of Statistical Concepts
Virtual Laboratories in Prob-
ability and Statistics
Opens URL Virtual Laboratories in Probability and Statistics
146 MENU DESCRIPTION
Processing
Option Description
Deplate Opens URL Sourceforge.net Deplate
MikTeX Opens URL MiKTeX project page
Pandoc Opens URL Pandoc (a universal document converter)
Txt2tags Opens URL Txt2tags ONE source, MULTI targets
4.14. HELP 147
4.14 HELP
Option Description
User guide (PDF) Opens the User guide with the PDF viewer default
What is new (PDF)? Opens the User guide with the PDF viewer default at What is new?
Some secrets for an eficient
use (PDF)
Opens the User guide with the PDF viewer default at Some secrets
for an eficient use
Check for update Opens an updater dialog
User list (discussion group) Opens URL Tinn-R Editor - GUI for R Language and Environment
user list
Ini files (path information) Displays a single dialog with the path information of ini files for
Tinn-R
Example of script (R) Opens the file Tinn-r_example of script.r
Recognized words (R) Opens the file Tinn-R_recognized words.r
File conversion (introduc-
tion)
See options ...
Citation (put on clipboard) Places a text containing the Tinn-R citation in the clipboard
About Opens the dialog About
File conversion (introduction)
Option Description
Deplate Opens the file deplate_intro.t2t
Pandoc Opens the file pandoc.markdown
Txt2tags Opens the file txt2tags_intro.t2t
CHAPTER 5
SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
The idea behind this chapter is that it has contributions from multiple
users
. If you find something that is not important but that you would like
to include here, please submit it to the project coordinator.
149
150 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Let us assume that you are a basic user of Rand you do not understand
the intricacies of computer languages and that you want to write and run
an R-script. The software providing an interface between Rand the user
is called a user interface. If this interface also has graphical capabilities, it
is called a graphical user interface or GUI.
Rrunning under Windows and Mac have a graphical interface (Rgui) that
allows you to submit your commands and see the respective results, but
that interface is a bit limited.
Many attempts have been made to provide Rwith a user friendly graphical
interface running on Windows. One of the most successful ones is Tinn-R,
which is arguably the most used "GUI" among Rusers on Windows.
A large number of Tinn-R users do not know how to improve its perfor-
mance and their productivity, so this chapter is an attempt to help you to
make the most out of its features.
Let us start, then. After downloading Tinn-R from its main Web page or
Sourceforge, you should install and open the software.
5.2. AFTER INSTALLATION 151
5.2 AFTER INSTALLATION
At the top of the screen there is a Main menu (1) and two toolbars: the top
toolbar is the main toolbar (2) and the bottom task bar is the Rtoolbar (3).
If your version is the same or above 3.0.1.0, Tinn-R does not require any
special configuration. That is, the program is ready to be used. One impor-
tant thing to be done before using it: set a Rmirror as close as possible to
where you work. For that, first click on
CTRL + F8
. This opens the
Tools
window, then click on
R/Mirrors
. Select the Rmirror and push the but-
ton that shows an hourglass in the taskbar. The chosen repository will
be the new default for all actions dependent repository (install packages,
upgrade packages, etc).
The second step is connecting Tinn-R with R. Look at the Rtoolbar. Almost
at the right end you will see two icons together: one is the Rsymbol and
the second is like a green television screen:
The first connects Tinn-R to R
Console
(32 or 64 bit), also called
Rgui
, the
second with
Rterm
. With Tinn-R the Rgui should be used only when you
need heavy and intensive processing; otherwise, you should always use
Rterm, which is a lot more much friendly, having many editorial features
of Tinn-R editor. However it consumes more computer resources. Click
on that little screen as soon as the connection with Ris made. That screen
will become red and Rterm will appear on a window by itself. You can
move that window across Tinn-R main window and dock it either at the
left, right or bottom side.
The best location will depend on the size of your computer screen. To do
so, just put the mouse on the blue strip at the top of Rterm window, click
the left button of the mouse and move. To dock it at either side just pull
it closer and closer to the chosen side and then, bingo, you will see how
it becomes when docked. We like to use Tinn-R with two monitors: the
editor docked in one and the Rterm (or Rgui) interface in other. It is a very
comfortable and productive arrangement. You should follow the same
procedure to dock the Tools window.
Since Rcomputer language is an interpreted one, each command given
gets its answer right away, therefore the most used command in Tinn-R
is the
send line
which sends the command line to be interpreted by R.
You will see the answer to the command at Rterm or Rgui window. This
command appears at the bottom icon bar, the sixth box, the one with just
one line.
152 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
You just have to click there and the line is sent to R. Even though this is a
nice way to do it, there is a faster way to send a line to R. First, click on Rat
the Main menu and then on Hotkeys (operational system). On the open
window click on the line
send line
to select it. Then go to the top right
blank edit box, click there and then press (for example,
Ctrl + \
), then
click on the bottom bar the button
Add
and then click on
active
radio
button.
Now, whenever you press
Ctrl + \
the line you are on is sent to R, it is
much faster than clicking with the mouse at the appropriate button and
has the advantage that you can send the line to Rwherever is the focus of
your present work in your computer.
You can also turn on and off the hotkeys by clicking the hotkeys on the
status bar at the bottom of the Tinn-R screen.
Another importantfeature on the status bar is the
smNormal
(
s=selection,
m=mode
) box. This allows you to select a portion of a file. Selecting it will
change your options to
smLine
or
smColumn
. The latter is helpful since
it allows you to select columns within a file without having to carry the
whole line with it. Give it a try.
The first icons at the Rtask bar are related to different ways of sending
instructions: The whole file, selected parts, the clipboard content, block
marked, contiguous lines, single line, current line to bottom of page, parts
of a line, Sweave and Knitr. Those are helpful when you are dealing with
long scripts, and may very well enhance your programming efficiency.
Almost all of them have the option to send lines straight to Rand with
(echo=TRUE) option.
5.2. AFTER INSTALLATION 153
154 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
5.3
SHORTCUTS THAT CAN MAKE YOU LOSE THE VISIBILITY OF A RESOURCE
CRTL + ALT + V: Toggles the visibility for two main bars (Editor and R)
CTRL + F8 : Toggles the visibility for Tools window
CTRL + F9 : Toggles the viability for Rterm window
If a shortcut is accidentaly typed, just toggle it and the related resource
will be visible again.
5.4. I’M PANICKING:WHAT DO IDO? 155
5.4 I’M PANICKING:WHAT DO IDO?
First: don’t panic (it’s not good for your health)!
•Do not uninstall and reinstall Tinn-R or Runnecessarily
. The ori-
gin of the problem (although rare) can be mainly the folder where
Tinn-R has installed its ini files (it does not use the windows registry).
For some reason, it was corrupted or damaged. The first step is to
know where Tinn-R stores these files:
Help/Ini files (path in-
formation)
will do the job for you. After that, close Tinn-R, rename
(or remove) this folder (it will be recreated after Tinn-R is restarted).
If this folder is not visible in your computer see useful links here.
•Feel free to write to the coordinator of the project
. If you submit a
bug report, please provide as much detail as possible. This includes
indicating the Tinn-R version, your operating system (Windows XP,
Windows 7, etc) and language (English, French, Portuguese). If the
bug is related to an interface with R, indicate which version of Ryou
are using, as well as whether you are running Rterm or Rgui. You
should also add the content of the Tools/Results/Ini log interface
since this will help us to address the issue promptly.
156 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
5.5 APPLICATION OPTIONS
General
At the main menu click on
Options/Application
. It will opens the win-
dow Options/Application/Main/General.
One important options here is the Computational syncronization (delay).
Several processes are dependent on synchronization between applica-
tions (R, converters, compilers). The optimal value of the delay is deter-
mined by the following characteristics: user habits, hardware and software
available. The ideal value is unique to the various possible combinations
of those three characteristics. Try to reduce to the minimum value (50
ms) and test it: if something does not work, increase it gradually and keep
testing until getting to the optimal value. The default value (100 ms) may
not be optimal for all users.
Appearance
At the
Option
window click on the tab
Main/Appearance
. You can choose
colors for each character’s foreground (FG) and background (BG) color.
The color pallet will open and you can then choose the appropriate color.
For people working extensive periods of time in front of a computer mon-
itor, dark (or pale) colors with a low level of radiation are recommended
for background, obtaining a contrast with characters.
5.5. APPLICATION OPTIONS 157
Dock
The dock contains a button called
Restore default
. When clicked, every
time you start Tinn-R the
Rterm
and
Tools
windows will be at the default
position. You usually do not want to mark it as you will lose your customiza-
tion. It is useful if any problem occurs with the resources (dock/hide and
place).
158 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
Editor options
The first window showing up is the
Display
. When first glancing at the
editor window (where you type your scripts) you may have noticed a thin
vertical line which is located at exactly 80 characters (default) from the
beginning of each line. This is called the edge line. This line is very helpful
to have a standard width for your texts, mainly when you increase or
reduce the font size (
CTRL + SHIFT + UP/DOWN
) as you increase the font
the edge line keeps on moving to the right, so that you can adapt the edge
column to your preferred font size.
You may choose the font and the font size by clicking on font (
Consolas
11pt
is a nice option). Gutter is the space at extreme left of the editor, out
of the text window, where you may number the lines of your script, just
click at your choice.
For the other two choices,
Advanced
options and
Keystrokes
see Editor
options.
5.5. APPLICATION OPTIONS 159
R
The first tab (
Path
) shows the paths to
Rterm.exe
or
Rgui.exe
. You can
also choose whether Tinn-R gets the latest installed version of Ror the
version you would like to use. If you have Windows 7 64 bit choose that
option located at the bottom of the window.
The next important tab is
Rterm
. The button
Trying to find errors
(at the editor), yes
means that errors in Rsyntax are searched within
the editor to find where the error shows up the first time within the script.
You will usually have to keep on clicking the
F3
key until you find the error
position.
160 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
Processing
The tab
Processing
allows you to set preferences related to processing,
namely text conversion and compilation. For example, click on
Latex/PDF
at
Viewer
(we suggest to use Foxit Reader or Sumatra). That, as it will be
shown later, will enable you to compile L
A
T
E
Xtexts and open them in .pdf
using Tinn-R. Do not forget to install the Miktex on your computer. If you
prefer DVI instead of PDF click on the DVI button.
5.5. APPLICATION OPTIONS 161
162 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
5.6 HIGHLIGHTERS (SETTINGS)
Highlighters settings
is a window that allows you to customize the
text you are working with in relation to appearance. Usually, you will be
working with R, R doc, R noweb, Tex or Text files. The type of file is marked
automatically at the left column of the window
Highlighters
. Within
the
Identifiers
section of the selected highlighter you may choose the
foreground (FG) color and the background color (BG) of each highlighter.
Since the best configuration of BG is the same for every identifier it is
possible to set BG for all at once; use a dark color for BG.
The option
Options/Syntax(highlighter)
is used to set the highlighter
of the type of file you would like, provided it is not the same as the one
you are currently working on.
5.7. TOOLS 163
5.7 TOOLS
This interface was designed to allow the expansion of resources. The
visibility of the window
Tools
can be changed using
CTRL + F8
. This
interface contains many useful features that will make your life easier.
Project
Project allows you to organize different types of files in a hierarchical
manner.
Even though your project can be found on the main menu bar, it is easier
to work with it using the tools window. Press
CTRL + F8
and the tools
window will open. Click Misc/Project.
Beginning from the left, the first icon opens up a window where you can
search for project files you want to work on. This file has an extension
.tps. Otherwise, go to the next icon to open a new project.
When you click on that project a window will open, allowing you to choose
the folder where the project will be stored.
The tree is composed by groups connected at the node level. Groups will
contain files with something in common. For example, if you are writing
a package, one group might contain all data files, another the demo files,
another the Rfiles, and so on. The third box contains three icons. The first
allows you to create new groups and also rename the deleted groups. The
fourth box (sixth icon) allows you to open a project or its parts.
164 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
The next icon allows you to open a text file with the path corresponding
to all files in the project. This functionality is useful when you move the
whole project to another computer. The path on the other computer may
be different from your computer, and so you have to change the corre-
sponding paths. Save it and start working on the same project on that
computer. You may use the search and replace options to perform that
change in paths.
Database
Shortcuts
You then go to
Tools/Database
as you click on the box, a small window
will open with five tabs. The first is
Shortcuts
. There is a long list of com-
mands, some with a shortcut already configured as a default while other
shortcuts can be configured by the user as needed. You may configure
the shortcuts that you are used to. However, if they are already in use by
the Windows operating system, they won’t work. The use of shortcuts can
improve the efficiency of your work. You can also have more than one
shortcut table.
Completion
5.7. TOOLS 165
Completion will help you speed up the process of writing
anything from
any language
. It allows you to personalize its database so that every func-
tion, script or text that you frequently use can be automatically inserted
in your script through the click of a button or trigger.
Let us start by using completion with the functions which are already
in the default database. First, click on
Tools/Database/Completion
. A
window will open showing all the functions saved in the database at the
bottom of the window. Now click on the fourth icon
Completion: edit
.
Another window will open, the group to which the function belongs being
marked under
Group
, the function being marked under
Function
and the
trigger under Trigger.
Now open a new file (
CTRL + N
) and write
rn
which is the
trigger for
the function rnorm
and then press
CTRL + J
or click on
Insert/Com-
pletion at the main menu.
Now, suppose that you have a section of a script which you use very of-
ten when writing scripts. For example, imagine the following script: x
<
-
rnorm(50); y
<
- rnorm(50) which generates two pseudo-random normal
vectors for x- and y-coordinates.
You then select and copy it to the clipboard, click again on the main menu
at
Tools/Database/Completion
and at the bottom of window click
New
.
Now, at the top in
Group
type the name of the group, in this case let the
name be
Examples
, it means that every other example could be saved
under this group. In
Function
type the name of this specific function,
for example,
norm
, and then type the trigger of this function you are just
creating, say, nm and in complete paste what you copied. Finally click on
Save
at the bottom of the window. Now go to your text type nm and press
CTRL + J
, that part of the script will appear on your text. Did you get the
idea?
Comments
The Comments resource is very simple and allows high level of user cus-
tomization.
From version 3.0.1.0 Tinn-R automatically recognizes the language of the
file on focus. Further, inside the file - if it is a syntax a multi-highlighter
(complex syntax) - which language of the line where the cursor (or selec-
tion) is found.
This identification is done automatically if (and only if) the option (x) Auto
detect language (recomended) is checked. Otherwise the user is forcing
the application to use the comments of the selected language (indicator
arrow).
Selected code snippets involving more than one language will not be
commented/uncommented and a warning message is issued. That is, you
must select only the snippet of a single language.
166 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
R
Explorer
This interface has its own pop-up menu, toolbar and three combo box.
The pop-up menu and toolbar contain the most common actions related
to an object explorer.
The button R explorer: refresh environment sends an instruction to Renvi-
ronment requesting the list of all loaded packages in the current session.
The result is shown inside a graphical classified list. When one of these is
selected, the graphical list (and structure) of the objects are shown.
There are two options of filter: type of objects and any sequence of char-
acters associated with the names of the objects.
It is possible to remove visible objects of the user workspace (.GlobalEnv)
using the key Delete. To do this, select an object and type Delete.
A double click in any selected object will add its name to the editor. If
the object is dragged to the editor interface, the textual description of the
object is always shown in a new file. It is useful to know the sources of
functions and to see data objects (vectors, frames, list, etc).
5.7. TOOLS 167
Card
The card is a database of distributions, mathematical functions, graphical
and statistical functions used in R. The main goal of this card is to serve
as a means of consultation for the most frequently used commands. A
double mouse click will insert your selection in the text you are editing.
Mirrors
168 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
The mirrors is an interface that allows the user to manage the repositories
(or mirrors) of R. You should always choose a repository physically closest
to where you are, so that, the Web communication tends to be faster and
more efficient.
The default mirror is the University Wien (Austria). Consider that this is
the central mirror of CRAN.
The reasons for the Tinn-R always set a repository (assets) are two:
•
To prevent Rkeeps asking which repository you want to use in each
session;
•
Workaround of intermittency (only related to
Rterm
) not always
showing the dialog for selecting the repository. That is, sometimes
the dialog is displayed and not others. The cause of this intermit-
tency is still unknown.
One important thing to be done is to set a Rmirror as close as possible to
where you work. For that, first click on
CTRL + F8
. This opens the
Tools
window, then click on
R/Mirrors
. Select the Rmirror and push the button
that shows an hourglass in the taskbar. The chosen repository will be the
new default for all actions dependent repository (install packages, upgrade
packages, etc).
R repositories are little changed with the passage of time. Thus,the database
Rmirros.xml
not need to be updated frequently. However, there are op-
tions that make the update whenever the user deems necessary:
5.7. TOOLS 169
• Button whose icon is a house on the taskbar Tools/R/Mirrors;
• Menu R/Update mirrors.
170 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
5.8 BARS
Tinn-R has three bars. The top task bar is related to the application and
editor, the second task bar is focused on R, and the bottom bar displays
the program status.
The top task bar (2) can have its location modified by draggin and dropping
with your mouse. Right click anywhere on top task bar (2) to see the pop-
up menu where you can choose which box of the bar you would like to
show or hide. Every box of that bar has a vertical line at its left side. Right
click at that location and you can move the bar up and down.
The Rtask bar (3) can be moved wherever you wish. Right click the vertical
line at the left side of the bar and move it across either the editor or
Rterm
.
Right click anywhere within the Rtask bar and choose between Send to
Rand Control Rto have them displayed or hidden.
The status bar at the bottom of the editor window, shows the current line
you are working on, the total number of lines, and the current column at
the first box. It also shows the modes which can be either
normal or read
only
. You are not allowed to make any changes in the
read only
mode.
There is also information about selection mode. It allows you to change
the way you select parts of the current working file. See After installation.
5.9. SPELL CHECKER 171
5.9 SPELL CHECKER
See the steps to be followed in order to install a dictionary. After installing
the dictionary, Tinn-R will automatically load it upon starting a new ses-
sion. To perform a spell check press
CTRL + F8
to open the tools window,
and then click on Spell. Go to the editor task bar where it says
ABC
. The
arrow to the left allows you to choose the language in which the text is
written. Click on
ABC
. All corrections are automatically added to the text.
After finishing this process, focus again on the editor and press
CTRL + S
to save all corrections.
172 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
5.10 SPLIT
Splitting the editor window is a very useful feature whenever you are
working with long and complex programs. Go to the main bar, click on
view/split. You may choose to split the window either horizontally or
vertically. You will get the same text on two different and independent
windows. Any change made in one window will be added automatically
to the other and so to the text itself.
5.11. EDITOR:HOW TO? 173
5.11 EDITOR:HOW TO?
Here we describe some tips.
Macros: how to use?
Tinn-R provides a useful macro option to help you with repetitive actions.
Click on
Tools/Macro
at the main menu bar. Then you will see see two
icons: Record
F7
and Play
F8
. Those icons may also be found on the editor
task bar. Here is an example: write a vector 1:20 and send it to R. In the
Rterm window you will see the numbers from 1 to 20 in a single line. Copy
and paste that to the editor’s window.
Suppose that you want to write a comma after every number, maintaining
a one space distance after the comma. Place the cursor just before the
number one and then press
F7
. A
+
sign will appear on the Record icon at
the editor taskbar, meaning that you are beginning to record action you
take on the screen. Press the right arrow to move across the number 1 and
type a comma (,), delete one space and move the cursor one space to the
right with the right arrow and press again
F7
to stop the recording process.
The little
+
sign will disappear. Now just press
F8
and see what happens.
When you reach the number ten it won’t work because now the numbers
consists of two digits and the spacings will not fit. After doing that for the
number nine the cursor will stop in the middle of the number ten, go back
one step to the left with the left arrow, and press space bar so that there
will be one blank space between the comma and the number ten. Now
press again
F7
to go across the number ten with the right arrow, type the
comma (,) and go one space to the right with the right arrow so the cursor
is now at the left side of the number eleven, press again
F7
, and then
F8
until the end. Try now to write those numbers in a vertical line across the
left margin without the commas using the macros again .
Marks: how to use?
One very useful navegation tool is the
bookmark
. To define the bookmark,
use
CTRL + SHIFT + [0-9]
(a key from 0 to 9) on the line you have cho-
sen. Then, to go to the corresponding bookmark just use
CTRL + [0-9]
. A
visual indicator appears in the left margin, just before the line number, of
that line. Suppose you are working on a long script and need to constantly
return to a specified line. You will see how handy it is. To undo it, just use
again CTRL + SHIFT + [0-9] using the same number, on the same line.
You may also mark a whole block. To to that, first select the block and
then click on Marks at the main menu and click on mark. As in the above
paragraph the number 0 will appear at the begining of the block and
174 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
the number 1 at the end. You can modify the box and send it to Rto be
processed.
Editor, Tools and Rterm: how to arrange?
CTRL + F8 toggles the visibility of window Tools and CTRL + F9 toggles
the visibility of window
Rterm
. Now press
CTRL + F10
,
CTRL + F11
or
CTRL + F12 and see what happens.
The use of two monitors is recommended in case of intensive use. Placing
R(Rgui or Rterm) on a second monitor makes working with data analysis
and development tasks very comfortable.
Active page using the keyboard: how to change?
CTRL + TAB : Change sequentially the active page to the right
(requires more than one)
CTRL + SHIFT + TAB : Change sequentially the active page to the left
(requires more than one)
Tab order: how to change?
Drag and drop the tab to the left or right.
Auto completion: how to use?
In principle it just opens and closes, with just one click, parentheses,
square brackets, brackets and quotation marks, i.e.:
( [
’ ". You just
click, say, the open parentheses and the editor automatically completes
the closing parentheses and after that puts the cursor in the middle of the
two.
However, it is not only this. If already exists a previous text doing just that
might be a bit laborious, since you have to delete one of the two elements
(the subsequent to the cursor), to move the cursor to the end of the text
and then to close the element (parentheses, square brackets, brackets or
quotation marks). There is an alternative for this: select the previous text
and type the open element, i.e: ( [ ’ ". It is all!
One of the most important feature of this resource is the following: you
just write the expression you want to complete, i.e.,
( [
’ " then you select
5.11. EDITOR:HOW TO? 175
the whole expression and press the element key. The two elements will
automatically be placed at the beginning and the end of the selection and
the entire selection will be preserved.
Important note
: This can be done in both, the editor as well as in the
Rterm window.
A single and illustrative example:
• A previous text:
• type sum and after to select the text:
• type the open parentheses:
A more complex and illustrative example:
• A previous text:
• select it:
• type the quotation mark:
• type cat:
• select the text:
176 SOME SECRETS FOR AN EFFICIENT USE
• type the open parentheses:
APPENDIX A
WHAT IS NEW?
This topic provides information about what is new in Tinn-R.
Year Versions released Cumulative sum
2019 03 208
2018 06 205
2016 01 198
2015 05 197
2014 08 192
2013 10 184
2012 03 174
2010 10 171
2009 16 161
2008 14 145
2007 26 131
2006 64 105
2005 25 041
2004 16 016
177
178 WHAT IS NEW?
A.1 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2019 (03)
5.3.3.1 (fev/25/2019)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug associated to the procedure
Help/Check for update
and the prior
5.3.2.1 (fev/12/2019) portable
version was
fixed.
5.3.2.1 (fev/12/2019)
•
The recognition of complex R object names for
print
,
plot
,
names
structure
,
edit
,
fix
,
help
,
example
and
open example
were im-
proved. For example, to all cases:
–iris
–iris[1]
–iris[c(1, 2)]
–iris3(1, 1, 3)
–iris$Sepal.Length
–iris[’Sepal.Length’]
–iris[["Sepal.Length"]]
that it will be correctly recognized.
•
The
Replace
procedure was improved. From now it will remember,
for all files, the same word list used to replacement.
•
The Tinn-R web site was updated,the new URL is:
https://nbcgib.uesc.br/tinnr/en/
.
5.3.1.1 (jan/06/2019)
• The status bar was redesigned.
•
The option
R send: line
have a new feature that allows the main
editor to send sequential instructions while the interpreter returns
the signal +(plus) after each incomplete instruction. This option
can be fast and easily switched in the status bar.
•
A new option to send instructions to R interpreter is being imple-
mented:
R send: smart
. The goal is to simplify to begginer users
to send complete instruction blocks when the cursor is located in
a complex context: Out of the first line of functions, instructions
with several contiguous lines and similar situations. The work is
advanced, but not yet fully done. Because of that, this feature is
A.1. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2019 (03) 179
disabled. If the user try to use/enable it, will get the message:
This
feature is still in development.
•
The interface
Hotkeys (operational system)
were simplified and
improved. Additionally, the amount of customizable user actions
was increased to 20. On demand, this number can be easily in-
creased. Due to this changes, the previous hotkeys will be lost and
it is necessary to recreate them from the new GUI.
•
Excepting the source files of Project Description (
Tinn_R.dpr
and
Tinn-R_portable.dpr
), all source code files were unified. There-
fore, from now on it became easier to compile and distribute the
setup eportable Tinn-R_X.X.X.X_setup.exe and
Tinn-R_X.X.X.X_portable.zip
versions, respectively. The custom
support in PortableApps standards were completely removed.
•
From this version it is possible to use some special characters (for
example:
.aa
,
-bb
,
_cc
,
dd
,
?ee !ff
and
@gg
) as trigger to data com-
pletion. All triggers of the new HTML group begin with
’<’
character.
It will give more flexibility to create completion to other languages.
•
The mechanism of completion was enhanced a bit. From now on
it is more user friendly related to the indentation of the text in all
supported languages.
•
Corrections were made in the popup menu interfaces
Rterm IO
and
LOG.
•
The option to donate to the project has changed. From now on it
will be a bank account in the name of project coordinator.
Please,
do not use the PayPal account anymore.
180 WHAT IS NEW?
A.2 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2018 (06)
5.2.2.0 (oct/04/2018)
• Parts of the source code were enhanced.
• Some window and dialogs were reworked.
•
The recognition of complex R object names for
search
and
search
in files were improved.
• Some keys from INI file were renamed to be more reliable:
–[Roptions]→[R Options]
–[Options TextDiff]→[Diff Options]
–[PandocHistory]→[Pandoc History]
–[PandocHistoryFrom]→[Pandoc History From]
–[PandocHistoryTo]→[Pandoc History To]
–[SearchTextHistory]→[Search Text History]
–[SearchDirHistory]→[Search Dir History]
–[SearchFileMaskHistory]→[Search File Mask History]
–[ExplorerFavorites]→[Explorer Favorites]
–[FileMRU]→[File MRU]
–[ProjectMRU]→[Project MRU]
Therefore, some user preferences can be lost (when applicable, it
will use the default values). Sorry for the incovenience.
5.2.1.0 (sep/28/2018)
• The main menu Web/R(search) were reworked.
•
The recognition of complex R object names
for sending instruc-
tions were improved.
5.1.6.0 (sep/26/2018)
• The Application options interface were reworked.
5.1.5.0 (sep/20/2018)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug from the versions 5.1.3.0 and 5.1.4.0 (sep/20/2018) re-
lated to the demo project was fixed.
A.2. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2018 (06) 181
5.1.4.0 (sep/20/2018)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug from the version 5.1.3.0 (sep/20/2018) relatedto R scripts
utils/infor.R and install.R was fixed.
5.1.3.0 (sep/20/2018)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug relatedto sending instructions when Rgui.exe was started
out of Tinn-R was fixed. Thanks to Allan Stewart-Oaten for
pointing it out.
• A new button was added to the Tools/R/Card interface to open in
the editor an example of the selected item.
•
New resources were addedto let Tinn-R access R remotely,via PuTTY.
The way if working is the same as using Rgui.exe locally, but there
are a few limitations.
•
The interface
Options/Application/R
were reworked, and new op-
tions were added.
•
The searching algorithm from the installers of R in the System Reg-
istry were remade. The problems issued by the non standardization
after the installation of Microsoft R (MRAN), which were causing
trouble in the correct identification of the installed versions were
reworked.
182 WHAT IS NEW?
A.3 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2016 (01)
5.1.2.0 (oct/15/2016)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Two major bugs introduced in the
pre-release version 4.2.6.0
have been fixed.
–
A bug related to
Help
,
Example
and
Open example
when all
files were closed was fixed.
–
A bug related to
Rterm interface (IO)
and the package
de-
bug
was fixed. Thanks to
Ivan B. Allaman
for pointing it out.
–A bug related to the custom color storage was fixed.
–
A bug relatedto the
Options/Syntax (highlighter)/Default
(to new files) was fixed.
–
A bug relatedto the
Options/Syntax (highlighter)
was fixed.
Thanks to Manuela Huso for pointing it out.
–
Some issues about the
completion
followed by
F3
to find the
next occurrence of |were corrected.
–
Issues about the installation of TinnRcom package (and its
dependences) were corrected.
•
A lot of
PRE-RELEASE
versions of the project have been released, not
restrict to testers. Thanks for testing and suggestions.
•
The installation of TinnRcom package (and its dependences) was
improved. From now, the sources (
.tar.gz
) and the binaries (
.zip
)
of the packages
formatR
,
svMisc
,
svSocket
and
TinnRcom
will be
released within the setup of Tinn-R. After the installation, it will
be placed at
packages
folder. So all will be installed from the local
.zip.
• The package TinnRcom was upgraded to the version 1.0.20.
•
The menu
options
has a new option:
R echo (on/off)
. This grants
the user the choice to echo (or not) some options of send file, selec-
tion, clipboard, block marked, contiguous lines a line to end of page.
A related button was add to R task bar. This made simpler and user
friendly these options. The default shortcut to toggle this option is
ALT + E
•
The procedure to
open a remote file from an URL
was improved
and also covers https protocol.
A.3. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2016 (01) 183
•
If the user choice in
Options/Application/R/Patch (R)
is
No
to
Use latest installed version (always)
option,at startup,Tinn-
R will search in all letters of the system drives for the fully informed
path of R. It is very useful in the portable flavours due to letters
changes in different computers.
•
The visibility of all
Page Control
and
Tab Sheets
caption were
improved.
• R will always start with two options:
–options(pkgType=’binary’)
–options(install.packages.check.source=’no’)
•
If the user do not have a personal library to manage the packages,
from this version on,Tinn-R willcreate a foldernamed
x.y
,relatedto
major andminor R version in the
C:/Users/User/Documents/R/win-
library/
. This library will be used as default to package manager.
The user can change the defaultlibrary at
Options/Application/R/-
Packages (R) in the Library trees (.libPaths().
• The default files Shortcuts.xml and Mirrors.xml were updated.
•
The default shortcuts related to focus on
Rterm interface
(Editor,
IO and LOG) were changed due conflict with Windows 10.
•
When using
Rterm
(except with the
Send File
option) all other op-
tions related with more than one line will be added do the
R his-
tory.
•
The source code related to identification of
library trees .lib-
Paths() was improved.
•
The
R explorer
interface related to identification of environments
from objects was improved.
•
The resources related to
update mirrors
in runtime were improved.
•
The resources related to
knitr
and
Sweave
were improved and new
options are in Options/Application/R/Packages/Knitr.
•
To all
knit
procedures it will be added the argument
quiet=TRUE
.
So, if you want more control, or to big documents, it is suggested
(for while) to use the knit with Rgui.exe instead of Rterm.exe.
•
The menu
Insert
has a new option:
R (assignment)
. This option
make flexible to insert
<-
and
->
assignment. As it is associated to
shortcuts, the user can customize both.
184 WHAT IS NEW?
• The navigator of all database was replaced.
•
The
IO
prompt of the
Rterm
interface is more user friendly. For this
set
Options/Application/Editor/Advanced/Scroll pas end of
line option.
•
It was add a new item in the main menu:
Tools/Processing/View-
er/Open current file (generic).
• The menu Web as heavy reworked and has new options.
• The windows Options/Application received improvements.
•
A new resource allowing the user to
open/learning/edit
the ex-
ample script of any R objet, from the
editor
,
Rterm/IO
,
Rterm/LOG
or window Tools/R/explorer was added.
•
The
tip
and
data completion
were deeply improved.
CTRL + SPACE
is the single trigger for both and the distinction is made in the con-
text of the call. Additionally this feature now find the object, the
package and the pattern in complex contexts multiline.
•
The shortcuts
CTRL + TAB
and
SHIFT + CTRL + TAB
, not user con-
figurable, can now be also used in all interfaces
Editor, Rterm and
Help to sequentially switch the pages.
• This version is full compatible with Microsoft R Open - MRO.
•
The folder
utils
was deeply restructured and it was added an in-
struction
unlockBinding("last.warning", baseenv())
to the new
file
info.R
to workaround a small bug among
svSocket
and
MRO
.
Thanks to Marc Laurencelle to pointing it out.
•
The identifier
Note
brought back to the highlighter of R family, and
due to this utility also added to
Text
highlighter. Thanks to
Ari
for
pointing it out.
•
The
R family, All and Text highlighter
receivedimprovements
related to strings identification. The intention is that they do not
identify the shortened forms (he’s, you’d, you’ve, etc.) as string.
• New options related to Rterm: IO and LOG highlighters.
•
The usability of
Rterm
interface is now more robust, stable and user
friendly.
•
An new resource
Check for update
was added to the main menu
Help.
A.3. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2016 (01) 185
• The development team would like to publicly thank Marc Lauren-
celle for the contributions and suggestions to Tinn-R project.
•
Tinn-R Team has two new members:
Philiphe A. Kramer
and
Swami de P. Lima, welcome!
186 WHAT IS NEW?
A.4 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2015 (05)
4.0.3.5 (jun/22/2015)
•
Due to two portable versions (simple and compatible with Apps)
were made some adjustments in the application source code and
project structure.
4.0.3.4 (jun/11/2015)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug relatedto
Rterm interface (IO and LOG)
and the pack-
ages
car
and
rms
was fixed. The origin of the bug is that when
both packages are loaded they change the pattern of messages
on the pipe. Thanks to Frank for pointing it out.
–
A bug related to
Update R mirrors
and the countries
Ger-
many, Spain and Sweden was fixed.
•
The versions 4.0.3.1,4.0.3.2 and 4.0.3.3 were restrict to testers: thanks
for tests and suggestions.
•
From this version on, Tinn-R will be released in three flavours:
Tinn-
R
,
Tinn-R Portable
and compatible with
PortableApps platform
.
•
Some files of the folder
utils
were updated to meet with
Tinn-R
Portable
project necessities. Therefore, the folder and paths of the
R variable .trPaths were changed to TEMP environment variable.
• The Help menu was slightly changed.
• The TinnRcom package was updated to version 1.0.18.
4.0.2.1 (Apr/29/2015)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the recent release (R3.2.0) and the installa-
tion of the necessary
TinnRcom
package were fixed. Thanks to
Duncan Murdoch for the support.
–
The file
Rinstall.R
located at the folder
utils
, where Tinn-
R is installed, was updated to suppress the download of two
packages (
Hmisc
and
R2Html
), no longer necessary to
TinnR-
com package.
• The TinnRcom package was updated to version 1.0.17.
A.4. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2015 (05) 187
4.0.2.0 (Apr/22/2015)
• Features Added:
–Drag and drop from R explorer to Editor.
–
An experimental Hex viewer (ATBinHex) was added to
Tool-
s/Results/Hex viewer
. There is a bug related to UTF-8 BOM
encoding file: the selection of (Char
Hex), only in the first
line, is not correctly associating the character with its corre-
sponding Hex. It has its own pop-up menu with many (and
useful) options.
–
New resources to autocompletion related to:
( [
’ " were
added. If there is a selection, the new feature will respect that.
–
A new option was added to
Options/Application/R/Rter-
m/Options (Rterm)
enabling the user to choose if setwidth
will be sent automatically when the panel width or font size is
changed.
–
A new option was added:
Project/Open demo
. The objective
is to show to novice user what is a project and it’s utility.
–The main menu Options has three new options:
Auto completion ( [ ’ " CTRL + ALT + C
Enable Notication CTRL + ALT + N
Update silently CTRL + ALT + U
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to Sumatra (PDF viewer) and User guide (PDF),
location of topics, was fixed. If you have it installed, please
upgrade to 3.1.1 or higher (SumatraPDF).
–Rterm
is now entirely updated after any changes in
Option-
s/Application or Options/Highlighters (settings).
–
A bug related to
line wrap
has been fixed: thanks to Frank for
pointing it out.
–
A bug relatedto character recognition of
Tools/Database/R/Mir-
rors was fixed.
–A bug related to Rterm/LOG text highlighter was fixed.
–
A bug related to
Page control files
and hints of files were
fixed.
–
Some bugs were fixed and it is more user friendly when the
editor is in split mode.
–
Some bugs were fixed related to Hide/Show resources of
Tools
panel.
188 WHAT IS NEW?
•
Pre-release versions 4.0.0.0 to 4.0.1.5 were restrict to testers: thanks
for tests and sugestions.
•Philipe Silva Farias began to work in the project as co-author.
•
An experimental file notification resource has been added to the
project. The options are at Options/Application/General.
•
Prior backup (full or database) will not be compatible anymore from
this version.
•
A set of new icons was created specially to the project: thanks to
Philipe Silva Farias for the hard work.
•
The visual identity of the project was changed: thanks to
Carolina
Sartório Faria for the work.
•
Some improvements were made in the
Options/Application
and
this interface has new options now.
• The usability of Rterm interface was improved.
• The URI highlighter has now a new identifier named Space.
•
The default shortcut to alternate the focus among Editor, IO and
LOG were changed.
•
The automatic recognition of hardware architecture (32 or 64 bit)
was improved.
•
The
project Jedi
used in the Tinn-R project was updated to the
latest version. Some bugs related to Tools and Rterm panels and
Auto Hide option were corrected.
•
The list of recognized words of R highlighter family related to
plot-
ting
has been updated. Thanks to
Berry Boessenkool
for pointing
it out.
•
The order of the objects was changed in
Tools/R/Explorer
. It has
now a more natural order and hierarchy.
•
The available fonts family were restricted to
True Type
and
Fixed-
PitchOnly.
•
It is now possible to open any URL from the Windows Opend Dialog:
File/Open.
•
Tinn-R Editor - GUI for R Language and Environment is a project un-
der GPL and distributed as freeware. Since creating and maintaining
the project involve many costs, donations are welcome!
A.5. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2014 (08) 189
A.5 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2014 (08)
3.0.3.7 (Mar/03/2014)
• Restrict release.
• Some improvements in the main interface and the User guide.
3.0.3.6 (Feb/28/2014)
•
The conversion options using
Deplate
or
Txt2tags
depends of
the file extension. For
Deplate
are recognized:
.dp, .dpt, .dplt,
.deplate and .txt
. For
Txt2tags
are recognized:
.t2, .t2t, .txt2tags.
and .txt.
3.0.3.5 (Feb/10/2014)
•Highlighters settings window was deeply reworked.
•Print preview window was reworked.
3.0.3.4 (Feb/08/2014)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Rhighlighter: expressions like the below. Thanks to
Arnold
for
pointing it out.
gsub("/", "\\\\", text)
–
Comment/Uncomment: the automatic detection of the lan-
guage and chunks (regions) for multiple (or complex) lan-
guages (like:
R noweb
,
R doc
,
HTML complex
,
PHP complex
,etc).
•
The
Comment
,
Uncomment first
and
Uncomment all
procedures were
improved.
3.0.3.3 (Feb/05/2014)
• Parts of the source code were enhanced.
•
The control over the previous focus related to various options (Op-
tions, Help, View, etc.) has been improved.
•
The IPC (Inter Process Communication) communicating Rterm and
Tinn-R was re-optimised. Now it its approximately
4x faster than
the prior version.\o/\o/\o/
• The User guide has been revised and improved.
190 WHAT IS NEW?
3.0.3.2 (Jan/30/2014)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Advanced options of the editor:
Options/Application/Edi-
tor/Advanced/Want tabs
. Now when tabbing (if there is a
selection)
<
TAB
>
and
<
SHIFT
><
TAB
>
act really as block in-
dent, unindent. It works only inside of the more important
instances of SynEdit class: Editor and Rterm/LOG.
Within Rterm/IO <TAB>has another function: to complete.
•
Some options of the interface
Options/Application/Editor/Ad-
vanced
are now more understandable. Thanks to
Berry Boessenkool
for the suggestions!
• The menu Help has a new option: What is new?
3.0.3.1 (Jan/29/2014)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
The installer of version 3.0.3.0 related to the file
data.zip
. The
file
data.zip
was corrupted. The installer of version 3.0.3.0
has been deleted from all servers and we advise users to not
redistribute this version. Thanks to
Mark A.
for pointing it out!
•
The STOP button is working again for
Rgui.exe
(but is not active
for Rterm.exe yet).
3.0.3.0 (Jan/28/2014)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Pop-up menu of:
Tools/Database/Completion
,
Tools/R/Ex-
plorer and Tools/R/Card.
• Parts of the source code were enhanced.
•
The IPC (Inter Process Communication) communicating Rterm and
Tinn-R was optimised. Now it its approximately 8x faster and also
more accurate. This really was an old dream!
• The User guide has been revised.
•
The menu
Tools/Processing/Compilation (Latex)
has a new
option: Make index (makeindex). The default shortcut is CTRL +
ALT +I.
A.5. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2014 (08) 191
•
The
Rterm
support to the function debug and the package debug was
a bit enhanced. The necessary instruction (below) is automatically
sent to the Rinterpreter from this version.
options(debug.catfile = 'stdout')
3.0.2.8 (Jan/22/2014)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Rhighlighter: quote argument of read.table function.
–Pop-up menu of Tools/R/Mirrors.
•
TinnRcom package was upgraded to version (1.0-15). The package
will be automatically updated.
•Tools/R/Mirrors:
–It has a new status bar showing the default repository
–
It has a new button on the tool bar which enables the opening
of the URL: current and default.
• The Print preview interface was a bit enhanced.
• Some icons of the Main interface and Tools panel were changed.
•
From now SumatraPDF will be the default viewer of the Tinn-R
User guide. If Sumatra is the default system PDF viewer it will be
used. Otherwise, a compact version released jointly with Tinn-R
(Install.path/sumatra/SumatraPDF.exe) will be used.
192 WHAT IS NEW?
A.6 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2013 (10)
3.0.2.7 (Dec/30/2013)
• The menu View was a bit improved.
• The User guide has been revised.
3.0.2.6 (Dec/28/2013)
•Tools
: the interface related to
Card
and
Mirrors
is now in a more
logic place: R.
•
The menu
View
was a bit improved. The more used options related
to
Rgui
,
Tools
and
Rterm
were duplicated, but can be easily found.
•
The menu
Help
was a bit enhanced and has a new option:
User
list (discussion group).
• The User guide has been revised.
3.0.2.5 (Dec/03/2013)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Double click on Tools/Database/Comments.
–Double click on Tools/Database/R mirros.
–The content of Help/Citation (put on clipboard).
–Active line (BG) option (Show/Hide) and Rterm.
• The default transparency was set to 0%.
• Some small errors were fixed in the User guide.
•
The version 3.0.2.3 and 3.0.2.4 were restricted to testers: many thanks
to all testers, mainly to
Michal Sacharewicz
for his suggestions and
tests related to R path identification!
3.0.2.2 (Nov/20/2013)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–An intermitence related to Sweave and Knitr.
• The User guide has been revised.
•
The main menu File has a new option: Template. This submenu has
template to: R script,R doc (Function,Dataset and Empty), R html,
R markdown and R noweb.
A.6. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2013 (10) 193
3.0.2.1 (Nov/19/2013)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Edit/Comment.
–
Recognition of latest version and update of all five database:
Shortcuts.xml
,
Completion.xml
,
Comments.xml
,
Rcard.xml
and Rmirrors.xml.
–Options/Application when the user choice Cancel.
•
The suport to
Knitr
package was improved and has more options
and resources:
–A new button: Knit to LaTeX (.Rnw).
–A new button: Knit to HTML (.Rmd, Rhtml).
–
Two new multi/complex highlighter:
R markdown
and
R html
were added.
–
From now Tinn-R will always open/update the output
(*.tex,
*.md and/or *.html) file(s) after interpretation.
–
If the option
Tools/Processing/Viewer/HTML
is marked, the
*.html output file will be opened on the default browser.
•
Parts of the source code related to
Sweave
were enhanced. From now
Tinn-R will always open/update the .tex file after interpretation.
3.0.1.10 (Nov/15/2013)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Rterm/LOG/Gutter.
•
Parts of the source code related to
R path
identification were en-
hanced.
•
Parts of the source code related to
Code completion
were enhanced.
3.0.1.9 (Nov/07/2013)
•
The URL of the projectwas changed to: http://nbcgib.uesc.br/lec/software/editores/tinn-
r/en
•
The
Rterm
interface now acepts the option
eoScrollPastEol
(Al-
lows the cursor to go past the last character into the white space at
the end of a line).
194 WHAT IS NEW?
3.0.1.8 (Nov/06/2013)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Options/Highlighters (settings)
not remembering when
more than one option (Bold, Italic and Underline) is marked.
–The visibility of the Toolbar Edit.
•
The User guide has been revised. From this version it will be dis-
tributed only in PDF format and written entirely in L
A
T
EX.
•
This version went through a long period of development and testing.
This version brings several improvements to the project and is the
best version ever released to the users. We hope you enjoy it!
•
The versions 3.0.1.0, 3.0.1.1, 3.0.1.2, 3.0.1.3, 3.0.1.4, 3.0.1.5, 3.0.1.6
and 3.0.1.7 were restricted to RC (Release Candidate) testers: many
thanks to all testers, mainly to
Jakson A. Aquino
(main author of
the nice Vim-R-plugin), for his good suggestions!
•
The SynEdit component used in Tinn-R project was updated to
the latest version. Unlike previous versions, all necessary changes
and adjustments in the sources of SynEdit were made separately
from the component, that is in units following the project source
code of Tinn-R. This change is intended to facilitate the collective
development of the Tinn-R sources.
• The sources of the project were deeply improved.
• Support to UNICODE was added (this was a very hard work).
•
The highlighters: R,TeX,All and Text were recreated to UNICODE
and all have new resources.
•
The
Sweave
highlighter was renamed to
R noweb
. It is a multi high-
lighter: R +TeX.
•
From this version Tinn-R Editor/GUI
needs a new version of
the TinnR package: TinnRcom
distributed with the Tinn-R instal-
l/setup program.
•
The RegEx PCRE was implemented in the project. We have now
more flexibility to deal with strings in the sources of the project.
• The window About was a bit enhanced.
•
The support to
DDE protocol
was removed from the project, it is a
bit old and hard to maintain.
A.6. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2013 (10) 195
•
The database for call tip was removed, due to constant updates of
covered packages, it is hard to maintain.
•
Two new database were added:
Rmirrors.xml
and
Comments.xml
.
The first allows the user to manage the R mirrors and the second,
the comments for all supported languages by Tinn-R.
•
The
Comment
,
Uncomment first
and
Uncomment all
procedures were
improved and from now are in the main menu
Edit
. Now it detects
automatically the language and chunks (regions) for multiple (or
complex) languages (like:
R noweb
,
R doc
,
HTML complex
, etc). The
comments default are all now in the database
Comments.xml
(user
configured). The user can force the use of an specific comment
by unchecking the option
Tools/Database/Comments: (x) Auto
detect language (recommended).
•
The unique communication protocol with R is now the TCP/IP un-
der the necessary
svSocket package
. There is a new option control-
ling whether R is connected and whether R is running automatically
or not. By default it is set to True.
•
The
R explorer
is almost fully based on temporary files, but the
request is made silently (if the package svSoket is loaded and the
communication (TCP/IP) is active). The reception of the informa-
tion from R underTCP/IP was removed forthis purpose. For massive
exchanging information temporary files are faster, more accurate
and stable.
•
Parts of the source code, related to call tip and data completion were
enhanced: it is now faster and more accurated (mainly related to
the OOP).
•Options/Application
window and related options were deeply up-
graded. It is important to note that the editor options are now inside
this interface.
• The menu Options/Editor was removed.
•
The menu
View
has a new option:
Gutter (show/hide)
with the
shortcuts
CTRL + ALT + G
associated to it. It will affect all instances
of SynEdit class: Editor, Rterm and LOG.
• The menu Edit and Format were a bit improved.
• An option menu Encoding was added to the main menu.
• The menu Help was a bit simplified.
196 WHAT IS NEW?
•
The main menu R was a bit improved and has three new options:
Set
.trPaths (temporarily)
,
Get info (R and TinnRcom)
and
Up-
date mirrors.
•
The button
R controls: packages
has new options:
Install
and
Load TinnRcom package.
•
The status bar was new panels showing the encoding and line end-
ings of the files.
•
The
Organize screen
procedure (related to screen arrangement of
Tinn-R and Rgui.exe) from now runs twice: since just once is not
enough for all flavors of the OS Windows.
•
Inside
Tools/R explorer
(Tools window) now
CTRL + C
copy the
R object name selected to the clipboard. This can be very useful.
2.4.1.7 (Mai/08/2013)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Copy buttom of Tools/Database (Rtip and Completion).
–R send: line (with empty files).
•Options/Application/R/Rterm/Options (Rterm)
has a new op-
tion:
Workspace image (close without ask for save)
. Thanks
to Roland E. Joss for the suggestion.
•
Some buttons of
R toolbar (print, plot, list names, list
structure, edit and fix)
are now enabled only with at least one
open file.
•
The main menu
Web/R Editors/GUIs and IDEs/Tinn-R
was a bit
enhanced. Tinn-R project now has its own Web page.
2.4.1.6 (Mai/06/2013)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug, noticed after the release of the R 3.0.0, related to the
Op-
tions/Application/R/Path (R)
and recognition of the lat-
est version has been fixed.
•
The user guide was revised: many thanks to
Jakson A. Aquino
(the
main author of Vim-R-plugin).
A.7. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2012 (03) 197
A.7 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2012 (03)
2.4.1.5 (Dez/06/2012)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the
Options/Application/Rgui/Recogni-
tion (Rgui)
accidentally added in the prior compilation (pre-
release 2.4.1.2) was fixed.
•
The versions 2.4.0.2, 2.4.1.0, 2.4.1.1, 2.4.1.2, 2.4.1.3 and 2.4.1.4 were
restricted to pre-release testers: Many thanks to all testers and for
the suggestions!
•
Basic suport to Pandoc (a universal document converter) was added.
•
The main menu
Help/Main/File conversion (introduction)
was
updated. Now it also contains an example of
pandoc.markdown
file.
• The User guide was thoroughly updated.
• The file Rconfigure_default.r was updated.
•
The convertion tools (Deplate, Pandoc and Txt2tags) are currently
enabled to all file extensions (including empty extension).
• The main menu Web was updated and has new options.
•
The message of any problem related to
R/Configure/Pemanent
(Rprofile.site) was enhanced.
2.4.0.1 (Nov/07/2012)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to
CTRL + ENTER
was fixed. Many thanks to
Le-
andro Marino for pointing it out!
–
A "bug" (the Microsoft eventually makes some drastic changes)
related to the Windows 7 (64 bit) and the path detection of R
(32-bit and 64-bit) was fixed.
•
The internal shortcut
CTRL + ENTER
doesn’t break the current line at
the cursor position any more, i.e, it preserves the entire line content
and starts a new one. Many thanks to
Leandro Marino
for pointing
it out!
•
The versions 2.3.7.4 and 2.4.0.0 were restricted to pre-release testers:
many thanks to all testers and for the suggestions!
198 WHAT IS NEW?
•
The graphical interface was updated with some improvements,
mainly the Application options:
–
A hierarchical tree view replaced the classical tabs approach.
It is better for large options like now.
–
The options related to path of DVI and PDF viewer was re-
moved. The default system for .dvi and .pdf will be used.
–
The option to close a prior instance of the viewer (DVI and
PDF) before compilation is now independent. It gives more
user control.
• A new toolbar Format was added to the main toolbar.
•
A new resource allowing reformat R code (selection or whole file)
using
formatR
package was added. The icon resource was placed
in the
Format
toolbar, so that from this version on, the
formatR
package will be necessarily together with the already traditional
TinnR and svSocket packages.
•
Due to the new resource related to the reformat code the variable
.trPaths was changed. As a result, it willbe necessary to run again the
R/Configure/Permanent (Rprofile.site)
. In this case,
do not
forget to remove any prior script generated by Tinn-R in the Rpro-
file.site file.
•
The
R/Hotkeys
interface was thoroughly reworked. Now it has two
tabs, Default and Custom:
–Default
: contains the already traditional instructions of Tinn-
R;
–Custom
:
allows the user to customize any instructions
to be
send to R interpreter (thanks to Philemon Lenherr for the sug-
gestion). The instructions must be as follows:
Simple:
search()
. The R interpreter willreceive
>search()
;
Replace word or small selection:
View(%s, title=’View
of iris dataset’)
. If the editor cursor is over the word
iris
or itis selected, the R interpreter will receive
>View(iris,
title=’View of iris dataset’)
Replace whole file:
source(%f, echo=TRUE, verbose=TRUE)
.
The R interpreterwill receive
>source(.trPaths[4], echo=TRUE,
verbose=TRUE)
. All rules related to send file are preserved.
•
Sorry, due to thoroughly changes made to the
R/Hotkeys
, all hotkeys
configured prior to this version will be lost. It will be necessary to
reconfigure them all.
A.7. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2012 (03) 199
•
The chapter
Some secrets for an efficient use
is being revised
by
Ricardo Pietrobon
and soon will be completed. Many thanks
for his hard work!
2.3.7.3 (Set/23/2012)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Not really a bug, but a correction related to prior versions which
do not recognize the
Options/Application/R/Rgui/Recog-
nition/Type is set to Whole related to R Console (32-bit).
•
This version was compiled with
Code Gear 2007 running under
Windows 7
. Previously it was compiled under Windows
Vista
or
XP
.
We noticed that some boring stuff were automatically corrected
by simply changing the operating system. That is, there were bugs
caused by older operating systems.
•
Some default startup values were changed. We hope it is now better
for novices.
• Basic support to R package Knitr was added.
• Minor improvements in the graphical interface.
•
The user guide has a new chapter:
Some secrets for an effi-
cient use.
200 WHAT IS NEW?
A.8 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2010 (10)
2.3.7.1 (Nov/24/2010)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug, accidentally introduced in version 2.3.7.0, which averted
opening a file by
Enter or Double click
, a recognized Tinn-
R file from Windows environment, was fixed.
2.3.7.0 (Nov/22/2010)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the intermittent loss of connection (or appear-
ent freeze) occurring on Rgui.exe was fixed.
•
The versions 2.3.6.4, 2.3.6.5, 2.3.6.6 and 2.3.6.7 restricted to pre-
release testers.
• The Application options interface was a bit changed:
–
The
Application options/R/Rterm
was split in two tabs:
Er-
ror
and
Options
. The tab Error has a new option:
Trying to
find code errors (at the editor)*
. It enables the user to
set Tinn-R in order to find code errors at the editor when send-
ing instructions to Rterm. It may happen that the error will
not be found at the right place, for example the error might
be the same word appearing in a comment which comes be-
fore the actual along the code. In that case the user should use
the shortcut
F3 (Find again)
. The word will appear selected,
than just press OK until finding the right error. The first search
done internally by Tinn-R has Case sensitive and Whole word
only as default, but, this is not passed to the search interface,
therefore the user should just select them if convenient. If the
error has number among letters Whole word only is not a good
option.
•
This version is
fully compatible with Windows 7 and R 2.12.0
.
•
The component XPmenu was removed from the project. Windows
XP users might find the Tinn-R appearance less attractive, but the
applicative is now more stable. As soon as possible, the project will
get a better option for skins.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
A.8. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2010 (10) 201
2.3.6.3 (Nov/14/2010)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug (introduced in version 2.3.6.0) related to interac-
tive use of Rterm interface, when R returns only one value, was
fixed.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
2.3.6.2 (Nov/13/2010)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug (introduced in version 2.3.6.1) related to automatic recog-
nition (and setting) of the paths of Rterm and Rgui from R
version 2.12.0 was fixed.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
2.3.6.1 (Nov/12/2010)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Permanent configuration ofthe file Rprofile.site from the menu
option: R/Configure/Permanent (Rprofile.site).
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
2.3.6.0 (Nov/10/2010)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Paths of Rterm and Rgui from R version 2.12.0 were fixed.
•
The
Application options/R/Path
has a new option:
Architec-
ture (bit)
. It enables the user to set R in order to run Rterm.exe or
Rgui.exe in either 32 or 64 bit. They run independently one from the
other. If the above dialog option
Use latest version (always)
is
set to
No
, the dialog box
Architecture (bit)
becomes disabled.
In other words, the path must be manually set. In this case, the user
preference (if valid) will not be changed when Tinn-R is starting. If
the dialog
Use latest version (always)
is set to
Yes
, the path of
the latest R version (32 or 64 bit) will found automatically. In case
the user’s computer is 64 bit and it has the latest R version installed
with both options (32 or 64 bit) the latest one has the preference.
202 WHAT IS NEW?
•
Rterm interface now recognizes the single occurrence of a string
pattern when using
TAB
in the prompt. The general behavior is not
as friendly as in Rgui or in Linux console, but it is working.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
2.3.5.2 (Apr/11/2010)
•
The
User guide
was revised by
Ricardo Pietrobon
in an attempt
to improve its flow and style. This is a work in progress, and so we
should be improving it over time!
2.3.5.1 (Mar/28/2010)
• Version restricted to developers.
•
The
User guide
was revised by
Ricardo Pietrobon
to improve its
style and readability. So far, we have partial revisions implemented
to chapters
Overview, Basics, Working with, Menu description
and parts of What is new.
•
The
Application options/R/Basic
has a new option:
Smart (all
send)
. When this option is set to
Yes
, all single line commands will
not be sent through source(...), but instead as Send line.
2.3.5.0 (Mar/04/2010)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Small corretions in the Application options interface.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
The Rterm interface has now a simple toolbar including the more
usual options.
•
The
User guide
is being revised by
Ricardo Pietrobon
and soon
will be more readable and intelligible. Up to now only chapters
Overview and Basics
have been worked out. Many thanks for his
hard work!
2.3.4.4 (Jan/10/2010)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the visibility of the buttons Send contiguous
was fixed.
A.9. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2009 (16) 203
A.9 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2009 (16)
2.3.4.3 (Dec/21/2009)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
2.3.4.2 (Dec/18/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the function
debug (package base)
in the
Rterm interface was fixed. It was generating an exception
Ac-
cess violation at address NUMBER in module ’Tinn-R.exe’.
Read of address FFFFFFFF
. This bug started in version 2.3.4.0
(Dec/06/2009).
2.3.4.1 (Dec/13/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to
Search in Files
and its links in the Tools
panel was fixed. It was not going to the correct line in the file.
This bug was related to the implementation of the resource
Remember file state in version 2.3.2.5 (Nov/03/2009).
•
The user can now hide/show the button
Editor: current line
to top in the R toolbar.
2.3.4.0 (Dec/06/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug relatedto the package
sem
by John Fox (functions:
read.moments
and
specify.model
) which generated an error when submit-
ting line by line within Rterm interface was fixed. Many thanks
to Frank for pointing it out!
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
The menu R/Rterm/Clear and the pop-up menu Rterm (IO and
LOG), both related to Clear option, were changed. This change al-
lows more specific control over IO and LOG of Rterm interface.
•
Two new options enable the user to send contiguous lines of script
to the Rinterpreter.
•
The small script generated by Tinn-R in the file Rprofile.site was
changed:
204 WHAT IS NEW?
–The parameter dep=TRUE was removed from the line
install.packages(necessary[!installed], dep=TRUE)
since the
Hmisc
package, which enables Tinn-R to export R
objects to TeX format, has several dependencies. This change
will speed up the basic Rconfiguration.
## Check necessary packages
necessary <- c('TinnR','svSocket')
installed <- necessary %in% installed.packages()[, 'Package']
if (length(necessary[!installed]) >=1)
install.packages(necessary[!installed])
–
Under the Rterm interface the graphical menu should enable
the user to choose the repository for a current session. How-
ever, this is inconsistent, sometimes showing this option and
sometimes not. Therefore, the best option is to set the pre-
ferred repository from the file Rprofile.site.
2.3.3.1 (Nov/10/2009)
•
The menu Tools/Utils was removed from the executable: it is re-
stricted only to developers and we forgot to make it not visible.
2.3.3.0 (Nov/09/2009)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
The menu View was enhanced with a new option Word wrap. It
allows the user to control the Editor,Rterm/IO and Rterm/LOG word
wrap. Word wrap is a feature of most text editors, word processors,
and web browsers, of breaking lines between and not within words,
except when a single word is longer than a line.
2.3.2.6 (Nov/07/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to Rterm interface and
Auto hide
option was
fixed.
• The automatic WordWrap option of Rterm interface is now off.
2.3.2.5 (Nov/03/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
A.9. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2009 (16) 205
–
A bug related to Ridentification, if Options/Application/R/-
Path/Use latest installed version (always) option is Yes was
fixed. This bug was detected only after the R2.10.0.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
Tinn-R now has the Remember file state setting option. The file states
are: all marks (0..9), the position of the cursor and top line of the file.
It was implemented using a XML database (Cache.xml). It can be
found at Options/Application/Main/General/Remember file state.
•
The option Send Marked block was enhanced. Now it works as be-
low:
– The file has no marks: the option will not be available (gray);
– The file has one or more marks and the cursor is above the
first mark, or below the last
: all text (above or below this mark)
will be sent, according to the cursor’s position (above or below
the mark);
– The cursor is between any two adjacent marks
: all text be-
tween those two marks will be sent.
•
Under Rterm interface it is possible to use the
TAB
as follow:
>
ba (followed by TAB)
. This procedure will send to Rinterpreter
the instruction
apropos(’ˆbla’, case.insensitive=FALSE)
and
it will not be visible. Rwill returns a character vector giving the
names of all objects in the search list matching ba. For example:
> ba (followed by TAB)
[1] "backsolve" "backSpline" "bacteria"
[4] "balanceMethodsList" "ballocation" "bandwidth.kernel"
[7] "bandwidth.nrd" "barplot" "barplot.default"
[10] "bartlett.test" "base.-.POSIXt" "base.+.POSIXt"
[13] "base.difftime" "base.help" "base.library"
[16] "base.loadhistory" "base.lockEnvironment" "base.rbind.data.frame"
[19] "base.save.image" "base.savehistory" "baseenv"
[22] "basehaz" "basename"
> ba
•
The family rmControls of components was removedfrom the project.
2.3.2.3 (Ago/06/2009)
• The Application options interface was enhanced.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
206 WHAT IS NEW?
2.3.2.2 (Jul/20/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug relatedwith Hotkeys (operational system) when changing
the status (Active not Active).
2.3.2.1 (Jul/19/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
An undesired and potentially danger option in the menu Tool-
s/Utils, used only in the development, was removed.
2.3.2.0 (Jul/18/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–All bugs related to database pointed out by users.
2.3.1.0 (Jul/15/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–All bugs related to database pointed out by users.
2.3.0.0 (Jul/10/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
The error message when typing
CTRL + TAB
inside the Rterm
interface whenever it was not split.
–
It now remembers the position of the Tabs files (top or botton)
when starting.
–
It now properly organizes the Tabs files in relation to other
toolbars whenever the user uses the
show/hide
option in the
toolbars.
–The intermittency of completion resources.
–
The Auto completion and Data completion now recognizes
split by a dot as a complete word: for example
my.function(
and my.data$.
–
Under Windows Vista the option R/Configure/Permanent (Rpro-
file.site now checks if the user has administrative privileges to
change the content of the file
Rprofile.site
, before insert-
ing the necessary script. If the user receives an error message,
it is necessary to manually change the security properties to
enable full control of the folder etc where Ris installed.
A.9. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2009 (16) 207
•
The Completion resource migrated to XML, it is more flexible and
easy to use. Now it is located in the the menu Tools/Database.
•
R card and R tip are now located in a more convenient place: Tool/-
Database.
• The R tip resource was updated.
•
Menu Format/Block was removed and all associated resources were
relocated to a more logic place: Format/selection.
• The User guide was expanded/enhanced in various topics.
• The Application options interface was enhanced.
•
A new option in the Application options allows more specific recog-
nition of
Rgui
. Now it is possible to avoid any windows caption with
the word Console to be recognized as a Rinstance.
•
The interface Tinn-R hotkeys was fully reworked and it is now more
simple and efficient.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
A new resource was added to the R send:
Clipboard
. It enables the
user to send the content of the clipboard easily to Rterm.
•
Sorry, due to bugs the highlighters Deplate and Txt2tags were re-
moved from the project. New ones will be made in the future.
2.2.0.2 (Feb/09/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Using
TinnR package version 1.0.1 or 1.0.2
Tinn-R did
starts when Rstarts with the instructions below in the Rpro-
file.site:
# uncomment the line below if you want Tinn-R starts always \RR{} starts
options(IDE='C:/Tinn-R/bin/Tinn-R.exe')
The origin of this bug was the change of the packages
svIDE
(and others no longer necessary) to TinnR package. One func-
tion that should do the job was not present (
TinnR package
version 1.0.1 or 1.0.2
). In the
new version of the TinnR
package (1.0.3)
, this function
trStartIDE
was added. The
option
R/Configure/Permanent (Rpfile.site)
will gener-
ate a new script:
208 WHAT IS NEW?
##===============================================================
## Tinn-R: necessary packages and functions
## Tinn-R: >= 2.2.0.2 with TinnR package >= 1.0.3
##===============================================================
## Set the URL of the preferred repository, below some examples:
options(repos='http://cran.at.r-project.org/') # Austria/Wien
#options(repos='http://cran-r.c3sl.ufpr.br/') # Brazil/PR
#options(repos='http://cran.fiocruz.br/') # Brazil/RJ
#options(repos='http://www.vps.fmvz.usp.br/CRAN/') # Brazil/SP
#options(repos='http://brieger.esalq.usp.br/CRAN/') # Brazil/SP
library(utils)
## Check necessary packages
necessary <- c('TinnR','svSocket')
installed <- necessary %in% installed.packages()[, 'Package']
if (length(necessary[!installed]) >=1)
install.packages(necessary[!installed])
## Load packages
library(TinnR)
library(svSocket)
## Uncomment the two lines below if you want Tinn-R to always start R at start-up
## (Observation: check the path of Tinn-R.exe)
#options(IDE='C:/Tinn-R/bin/Tinn-R.exe')
#trStartIDE()
## Option
options(use.DDE=T)
## Start DDE
trDDEInstall()
## Short paths
.trPaths <- paste(paste(Sys.getenv('APPDATA'),
'\\Tinn-R\\tmp\\',
sep=''),
c('',
'search.txt',
'objects.txt',
'file.r',
'selection.r',
'block.r',
'lines.r'),
sep='')
If you uncomment this part:
## Uncomment the two lines below if you want Tinn-R starts always
R
starts
## (Observation: check the path of Tinn-R.exe)
options(IDE='C:/Tinn-R/bin/Tinn-R.exe')
trStartIDE()
A.9. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2009 (16) 209
The new TinnR package will do the job!
2.2.0.1 (Feb/05/2009)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Latex font Enphase was fixed. It was inserting
\
textbf{} instead
of \emph{}.
–
Save and load workspace is now enabled only if Rterm is run-
ning.
–
A bug associated with the Color preferences interface related
to Txt2tags and Deplate syntax, not allowing to change the
background color of the root element in the correct way was
fixed.
•
All prior documentation of the Tinn-R project was updated. Some
parts were expanded and others were excluded, new ones were gen-
erated and, finally, all were joined in the new User guide. This What
is new is now part of this user guide. The source files (written in
Txt2tags) of this User guide are available in the folder
doc/english/user_guide
where Tinn-R is installed. This way, we hope that the user will be
able to help us in making it better, day by day, by sending us any
useful contribution.
•
The R toolbar can now be docked at left, top, right and bottom side of
the main interface. Some issues related to Rterm and Tools interface
when dragging the Rtools bar, have not completely been solved yet.
In order to fix any problem, hide and show again the Rterm or Tools
interface.
•
The match brackets resource (default shortcut is
CTRL + B
) was
added also to the Rterm interface (IO and LOG).
•
The Tools interface was a bit reworked and the menu Views was
changed to accommodate the changes.
• The menus View and Help were a bit reworked.
•
The send and control Rresources were extended to all instances of
the synEdit class. In other words, if you put the cursor in any word,
or select any text in the Editor (split or not), IO or LOG (docked or
not, in the same or distinct monitors) interface and, after this, select
an action (print content, plot, etc) it will be executed.
210 WHAT IS NEW?
A.10 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2008 (14)
2.1.1.6 (Nov/17/2008)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–All fonts of Tools/Markup interface are now visible.
• The Application options was a bit reworked.
•
Due to focus changes behavior in the latest Tinn-R version (2.1.1.5),
the focus control button (options toolbar ) will be not enabled if
Rterm is running. In this case, the focus will be always returned to
the interface (editor or Rterm) that has the prior focus before all
send/control options.
2.1.1.5 (Nov/12/2008)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Related to Inverse DVI Search;
–Focus control working with dual monitor.
•
The latest Windows installer version is 2.3. Therefore, it was neces-
sary to adapt Tinn-R to work with the interpreter Phyton for Win-
dows (python.exe) and the python script to make the conversion
(txt2tags). The current version of Txt2tags is 2.5.
•
To install and configure the necessary resources follow these simple
steps:
1. Download and install the interpreter Python;
2.
Download and unzip Txt2tags inside any folder anywhere in
your computer;
3.
Inside ofTinn-R,go to ’Options/Application/Processing/Txt2tags’
and inform the necessary: parameters (-t is the default) and the
paths of interpreter (
python.exe
) and the converter(
txt2tags
python script);
4. It is enough to use these nice tools in the Tinn-R project.
A.10. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2008 (14) 211
2.1.1.4 (Nov/10/2008)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Closing the applicative if Rterm is runnig (random bug).
–Options: return focus after sending to R:
If in editor, the focus shifts back after sending to R;
If in Rterm (or Rgui), the focus does not jump back to
editor when you press return:
ENTER
(prompt line), or
CTRL
+ ENTER (any prior line).
•
The Options/Application/Main menu has a new
Dock
page. It en-
ables the user to fix any possible problem related to visualization
(dock/hide) and layout of the Tools and Rterm interfaces.
• The resources of Rterm interface were extended:
–
All resources available enabling the control of Rare now also
available to IO and LOG interfaces: print content, plot, list
names, etc;
–
To all options enabling the control of R, THE FOCUS WILL BE
MAINTENED IN THE CURENT WORK INTERFACE Editor or
IO, DISREGARDING the Options: return focus to editor after
send/control R(toogle).
• Rterm interface and debug package:
–
Changes were made to the debug package (1.0.2) on the mes-
sage system (stdout and stderr). The default option is not com-
patible with Rterm interface implementation.
–
The best way to make it compatible again is to add the option
below in the Rprofile.site file:
options(debug.catfile = 'stdout')
212 WHAT IS NEW?
2.1.1.3 (Nov/04/2008)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Application options/Appearance when the user select Cancel.
–
R control: packages (both: Load and Remove) and Rterm inter-
face.
–
Rterm interface under package debug of Mark V. Bravington
when the user type qqq() to quit the debugger.
• The interface Go to line number was a bit reworked.
2.1.1.2 (Oct/20/2008)
•
The appearance of the main menu and all pop-up menus were
improved.
•
Now Tinn-R is able to perform
inverse DVI search
. It is only nec-
essary to set the path of the binary of Tinn-R and the parameter for
file and line in your DVI previewer. For example, using the YAP of
Miktex, the necessary configuration will be (assuming the default
Tinn-R path):
C:\Tinn-R\bin\Tinn-R.exe "%f;%l"
Be sure that there is not space between the parameters %f(related
to file) and %l(related to line).
Inside Tinn-R (Options/Application/Processing/Latex/DVI) it is nec-
essary to add the compilation Miktex parameter: latex -c-style-
errors
-src-specials
. Tinn-R can do it automatically with the op-
tion Restore default. Now, it is:
latex -c-style-errors --src-specials
and
bibtex --src-specials
2.1.1.1 (Oct/15/2008)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Bugs of the version 2.X.X.X (prior of this version) related to
the R/Configure/Temporary (current session) and R/Config-
ure/Permanent (Rprofile.site) were fixed.
A.10. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2008 (14) 213
–
A bug related to the Rterm interface with incomplete instruc-
tions (’+’) was fixed. An undesirable carriage return after the
’+CR’, the origin of the bug, was eliminated.
–
A bug relatedto the status (show/hide) of the toolbars Spell and
Search when closing and starting the application was fixed.
• Version restricted to pre-release testers.
•
The way Tinn-R creates the variable
.trPaths
was changed. Now it
is automatic. It was posted on Tinn-R forum by KeithJ (keith_jewell)
- 2008-09-15 16:00. It is very useful in laboratories where most users
have their own account but use the same computer. Now it is not nec-
essary to adapt the file
Rprofile.site
for each user and Rsession
any more. Many thanks to keith Jewell for the nice suggestion.
.trPaths <- paste(paste(Sys.getenv('APPDATA'), '\\Tinn-R\\tmp\\', sep=''),
c('','search.txt','objects.txt','file.r','selection.r','block.r','lines.r'), sep='')
•
The option Save/Load workspace to the Rterm interface was added.
Many thanks to Maria Conceição for the suggestion.
•
The Tools and Rterm interfaces were reworked and now both are
dockable. It makes the interface flexible and user customizable.
Many thanks to Thomas Petzoldt for the suggestion.
•
A new option was added to the Options:
max.deparse.length (echo=TRUE)
.
It is used if
echo is TRUE
and gives the maximal number of char-
acters output for the deparse of a single expression.
• The weblinks links of the menu Web were all updated.
•
In order to attend to the request of some users, the menu (and re-
lated pop-up menu) Edit go back to the project interface with a
new implementation. Due to the large frequency of the use of class
SynEdit (editor, editor split, IO, LOG, etc), the action will be apllied
in the active (selected) instance of the class SynEdit.
•
The font of the Rterm interface is now updated after changes to
Options/Editor/Display/Font.
2.0.0.7 (Sep/04/2008)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A bug related with the package Rterm interface was fixed.
214 WHAT IS NEW?
2.0.0.6 (Aug/21/2008)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the package Matrix was fixed. Many thanks to
Frank for point it out!
•
The Rterm interface can be used to connect with Ras a remote server.
Sorry, it is already running, but it was not finished yet!
2.0.0.5 (Aug/17/2008) - pre-release
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the function debug(base) was fixed. Many
thanks to Steven for pointing it out!
2.0.0.4 (Aug/12/2008) - pre-release
•
Smallcorrections and adaptations suggested by testers. Many thanks
to Steven.
• The Rhistory now stores up to 100 instructions.
2.0.0.3 (Aug/05/2008) - pre-release
•
Version 2.0.0.2 (Jul/23/2008) was released to some selected users
for tests; it was the lastest version compiled under the IDE
Delphi
7of Borland.
•
This version, and from now on, all versions will be compiled under
the IDE Code Gear 2007, the latest of Borland.
2.0.0.2 (Jul/23/2008) - pre-release
•
Small corrections suggested by pre-release testers. Many thanks to
John,Steven and Frank for the tests and suggestions.
•
This version, unlike 2.0.0.1, is fully compatible with the very useful
package debug (of Mark Bravington). It remains an unsolved prob-
lem to submit, when debuging, an external script with incomplete
line, like the one below:
plot(rnorm(1e2), main = 'It will cause error!')
A.10. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2008 (14) 215
2.0.0.1 (Jul/22/2008) - pre-release
• Version restricted to pre-release testers.
•
The structure of the ini and the routine of initialization were deeply
reworked:
–
The old backups
will not be compatible anymore with this
one and future versions;
–When used for the first time, this version will try to recognize
almost all prior user preferences.
•
A new folder,
bkp
, was added to the ini files structure. It contains all
backups of all prior user preferences not (or partially) compatible
with the new versions. The control of all default resources are now
individual, i.e: custom,data,latex,shortcuts and syntax.
• The R explorer functionality was reworked:
–
The functions (
trObjSearch
and
trObjList
) were reworked.
These functions are distributed with the package svMisc (
>
=
0.9.40) of Philippe Grosjean;
–
To make the Rinterface cleaner, a new variable
.trPath
is
used as additional parameter to the two functions above. It
will avoid a long string like
path="C:/Documents and settings/User/Application Data/Tinn-R/Tmp/..."
to Windows XP or
"C:/Users/jcfaria/AppData/Roaming/Tinn-R/tmp/..."
on Windows Vista;
–The Robject .trPath is a list described below:
.trPath <- list(
Tmp = 'C:/Users/jcfaria/AppData/Roaming/Tinn-R/tmp/',
Search = 'C:/Users/jcfaria/AppData/Roaming/Tinn-R/tmp/search.txt',
Objects = 'C:/Users/jcfaria/AppData/Roaming/Tinn-R/tmp/objects.txt',
File = 'C:/Users/jcfaria/AppData/Roaming/Tinn-R/tmp/file.r',
Selection = 'C:/Users/jcfaria/AppData/Roaming/Tinn-R/tmp/selection.r',
Block = 'C:/Users/jcfaria/AppData/Roaming/Tinn-R/tmp/block.r',
Lines = 'C:/Users/jcfaria/AppData/Roaming/Tinn-R/tmp/lines.r'
)
–
The best way to set the variable
.trPath
inside of Ris using the options:
R/Configure/Temporary
or
R/Configure/Permanent
, both can be found in
the main menu of Tinn-R R/Configure;
•
The options to send File,Selection,Block and Lines to end page, were
reworked:
–
The objective was to maintain the Rinterface cleaner, thus
avoiding long strings;
216 WHAT IS NEW?
–All above are also dependent on the variable .trPath;
–
As already noted, the best way to set the variable
.trPath
in-
side Ris using the options:
R/ Configure/ Temporary
or
R/
Configure/Permanent
. Both can be found in the main menu
of Tinn-R R/Configure
•
The source code of Tinn-R was deeply reworked. The aim was to
maintain the prior user knowledge, the stability, and the structural
simplicity, but add more flexibility and power to the GUI, mainly
associated with the new
Rterm
interface. The IO and LOG interfaces
are instances of the class synEdit:
–IO
: the aim was to add flexibility and power, i.e., joining the
power of synEdit (editor) and the functionality of a common
console. All prior user knowledge of the resources associated
with the editorwere preserved: marks, shortcuts, syntax,match
brackets, tips, code completion, data completion, etc;
–LOG: has two basic objectives:
1. To make the IO interface cleaner;
2.
To avoid synchronization difficulties with the interprocess
communication (IPC) called pipe in use.
–
The shortcuts and the pop-up menu makes it easy to change
among the interfaces: Editor,IO and LOG:
1.
The common Windows shortcut
CTRL + TAB
changes the
active page (IO-LOG).
2.
Any prior line can be sent another time by just placing the
cursor anywhere on and typing: CTRL + ENTER;
–
The last line of the IO interface (the prompt) has special fea-
tures:
1. It has some restrictions for edition and navigation;
2. ALT+DOWN
and
ALT+UP
are the shortcuts (prior/later) for
command history. Both are continuous, cyclic and have a
50 lines limit (we think it is sufficient, but if necessary it
can be increased to 100 or more).
•
When more than one recognized instance of Ris running the priority
order is:
1. Rterm;
2. Rgui;
3. Rserver (remote);
A.10. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2008 (14) 217
•
The use of the clipboard as IPC was removed for all. It was an old
request of users to avoid conflict with other application, mainly with
the Open Office suit.
•
The communication with
Rterm
is more specific and efficient than
with
Rgui
. Therefore, it will receive more attention from the devel-
opers from now on. The interface with Rterm is not finished yet, but
it is running nicely...
–If some problem happens: press ENTER;
–If it is not solved, type anything and press ENTER;
–
If it still not solved, sorry: close and restart the Rterm instance;
–Remember: it is not finished yet!
• The TCP/IP resources now are used only with two objectives:
1. Local: to make the Rterm and Rgui console cleaner;
2. Remote: for all: send, control and output.
•
A new interface Work expl. was added to the Tools interface. It will
always show the folder and files of the latest file opened. It is sim-
pler and has complementary resources to the textitWindows expl.
interface.
•
The menu Edit and associated pop-up menu were removed, but, all
the functionality was preserved under shortcuts. To set the prefer-
ences see Options/Editor/Keystrokes.
• The Tools interface was a bit reworked and has new resources.
• The main menu was a bit reworked.
• The interface of the application options was a bit reworked.
•
Due to new resources (IO interface related with
Rterm
) the default
shortcuts to view Line numbers and Special characters were changed
to
CTRL + ALT + L
and
CTRL + ALT + K
respectivelly. Now
CTRL +
Lclears the IO and LOG interface, like Rgui.
•
The main component synEdit was updated to the latest stable ver-
sion and minor bugs were fixed.
• The descriptions of the synEdit editor options is:
218 WHAT IS NEW?
Option Description
Auto indent
Will indent the caret on new lines with the same amount of leading white space
as the preceding line
Auto size scroll width Automatically resizes the MaxScrollWidth property when inserting text
Drag and drop editing
Allows you to select a block of text and drag it within the document to another
location
Alt sets column mode
Holding down the
<
ALT
>
key will put the selection mode into columnar format
Maintain caret column
When moving through lines w/o cursor past EOL, keeps the X position of the
cursor
Want tabs
When active
<
TAB
>
and
<
SHIFT
> <
TAB
>
act as block indent, unindent when
text is selected
Smart tabs
When tabbing, the cursor will go to the next non-white space character of the
previous line
Smart tab delete Similar to Smart Tabs, but when you delete characters
Enhance home key Enhances HOME key positioning, similar to visual studio
Enhance end Key Enhances END key positioning, similar to JDeveloper
Hide scrollbars as necessary
If enabled, then the scrollbars will only show when necessary. If you have Scroll-
PastEOL, then the horizontal bar will always be there (it uses MaxLength instead)
Disable scroll arrows
Disables the scroll bar arrow buttons when you can’t scroll in that direction any
more
Half page scroll
When scrolling with page-up and page-down commands, only scroll a half page
at a time
Scroll by one less Forces scrolling to be one less
Scroll past end of file Allows the cursor to go past the end of file marker
Scroll past end of line
Allows the cursor to go past the last character into the white space at the end of
a line
Show scroll hint Shows a hint of the visible line numbers when scrolling vertically
Scroll hint follows mouse The scroll hint follows the mouse when scrolling vertically
Tabs to spaces Converts a tab character to a specified number of space characters
Trim trailing spaces Spaces at the end of lines will be trimmed and not saved
Group undo
When undoing/redoing actions, handle all continuous changes of the same kind
in one call instead undoing/redoing each command separately
Right mouse moves cursor
When clicking with the right mouse for a pop-up menu, move the cursor to that
location
Show special chars Shows special characters
A.11. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2007 (26) 219
A.11 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2007 (26)
1.19.4.7 (Dec/23/2007)
•
Application option was a bit improved. Now, it is posssible to set
Tinn-R to close previous instance of the viewer (PDF or DVI) in the
Processing/Latex/More options. Makes it easier to compile under La-
tex, as Miktex will not gives the message:
I can’t write the file
...
in the DOS prompt. Note that
any instance of the viewer
(if opend)
with the caption
’FileBeeingCompiled’.pdf
will be
closed.
1.19.4.6 (Dec/17/2007)
• A very simple splash screen was added to application starting.
•
The functionality of Latex/Accents was improved. Now if you have a
selection in the editor it will be filled inside the brackets ’{}’, other-
wise, the simple accent will be inserted.
1.19.4.5 (Dec/14/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A couple of bugs related to the prior version 1.19.4.4 (Dec/13/2007)
were fixed.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
1.19.4.4 (Dec/13/2007)
•
The appearance of the Latex symbols now have a better layout, al-
phabeticalilly ordered. The structure of ini file, related with to it,
was also changed.
•
This version enables the user to settwo comment(s) character(s): the
main (used for all syntax) and to latex. The options were added to the
main menu Format/Block: it is possible to comment all,uncomment
first and uncomment all. The Application options was a bit reworked
to allow the user to set the preferred latex comment (%, %%, %%%,
etc).
•
Some default shortcuts were changed. The ini file related will be
updated to reflect these changes and a backup of the old resource
file will be made at first use of this version.
220 WHAT IS NEW?
1.19.4.3 (Dec/12/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related with the new resource Count in latest version
1.19.4.2 (Dec/11/2007) was fixed.
• The tool Markup/Latex was improved.
•
Latex Itemization and Enumeration procedures were a bit improved.
•
The color of the
matched brackets
are now user configurable. Set
it at Options/Syntax and colors/Preferences/Brackets(FG).
1.19.4.2 (Dec/11/2007)
• The tool Markup/Latex was improved by adding a toolbar.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
• The Application options interface was a bit reworked.
1.19.4.1 (Dec/01/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A couple of bugs related to the prior version 1.19.4.0 (Nov/29/2007)
were fixed.
•
The structure of the Tinn.ini file and the routine of initialization
were a bit reworked. So, the old backups
will not be compatible
anymore with that one and future versions
. This version will
recognize the basic old system configurations, but not all prefer-
ences. Sorry for the inconvenience.
1.19.4.0 (Nov/29/2007)
•
The Main menu was a bit reworked and some options have now a
better logic place.
•
The tool Markup was improved by adding a graphical interface to
Latex symbols:
–
This is the first approach to a functional latex symbol classifi-
cation:
Functional LaTeX Symbols Classification Criteria (according with the KISS principle):
1. Empty
2. Natural order (ex: Greek: alpha, beta...; Solar system: Sun, Mercury...)
A.11. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2007 (26) 221
3. Usability
4. Structural simplicity
5. Number of straight lines
6. Number of curved lines
7. Number of sloped lines
8. Clock wise rotation
Authors: José Cláudio Faria and Jorge Alexandre Wiendl
Date : 11/27/2007 00:55:20
KISS : Keep it simple, stupid
–
We would like it if advanced latex users could help us with this
classification;
–The graphical interface is based on the text files organization
of the folder latex, located at Ini files;
–
Once the order of the symbols (number controlled) in each
folder is changed, after restarting Tinn-R, it will reflect this or-
der and maintain all functionality. Therefore, it is very flexible;
–
It is recommended that the numeration criteria used in the
classification (ex:
001_mysymbol1.gif
,
002_mysymbol2.gif
)
be maintained;
–With the exception of png, many image formats can be used;
–Please, don’t remove or rename any of the folders or
their names;
–
It was a hard task, so, we don’t consider the job finished yet: all
users will be welcome with their contributions.
•
The main menu has a new option Insert/Latex. It enables the user to
make Numerical elements:
Array, Matrix, Table and Tabbling
.
1.19.3.1 (Nov/15/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A couple of bugs related with ini file were fixed.
1.19.3.0 (Nov/12/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A couple of bugs related to the Project interface were fixed and
its interface was enhanced.
–A bug related to the Most Recent Used (MRU) files was fixed.
•
All prior Tinn-R version of the release 1.19.3.X were considered pre-
released (restricted to beta testers only). Many thanks to all testers.
222 WHAT IS NEW?
•
Good news for Sweave users: debug, i.e, send line by line a
Sweave
script
, was enhanced. Now, Tinn-R will
search automatically
only inside of the chunks
and will disregard all LaTeX texts.
You
must start this resource inside of any chunk.
•
The structure of the Tinn.ini file was a bit reworked. So, the old back-
ups
will not be compatible anymore with that one and fu-
ture versions
. This version will recognize the basic old system
configurations, but not all preferences. Sorry for the inconvenience.
•
The default ini file for main shortcuts was changed from short-
cuts.bin to shortcuts.txt. Therefore,
any old preferences will be
lost
. It will be ncessary to define all the personal preferences again.
Sorry for the inconvenience.
•
The main component SynEdit was updated to the latest stable ver-
sion (2.0.6).
•
The Search results have now the same appearance of the Text high-
lighter.
•
In Tools the interface Tags was renamed to Markup. The next re-
source (we are working in it) will be related with LaTeX.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
• The Application options interface was a bit reworked.
• The pop-up menu of Project interface was a bit enhanced.
•
The status bar functionality was a bit enhanced. Now you can click
inside a specific panel to change the options.
• The way as Tinn-R closes the Rgui was enhanced.
•
The way the brackets are highlight (parent matching) was changed.
Now it will contrast with the color with the Active line highlighted;
see in (Options/Main/Application).
•
The Results interface was a bit reworked and has now new resources:
Ini log and a new button enabling full expansion. It is a good idea
to check the content of the Ini log if any thing is wrong.
1.19.2.3 (Mar/05/2007)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
This version enables you to compile
LaTeX
files with
bibtex
option:
A.11. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2007 (26) 223
1.19.2.2 (Feb/22/2007)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
1.19.2.1 (Feb/19/2007)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
The first approach to a easy Rpackage manager was implemented:
•
To avoid Rflicker, if TCP/IP connection is active and the R output is
visible, the Clear console (F9) and Clear all (F12) will not work on
the Rconsole. We will be searching for the best solution.
1.19.2.0 (Feb/16/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A bug related to the prior version and R toolbar was fixed.
1.19.1.13 (Feb/13/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug that occurred when organizing the main toolbar, in the
first use, was fixed.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
224 WHAT IS NEW?
•
An experimental graphical interface for tags was added to the pro-
gram. It was made by adding a new tab named Tags on the panel
Tools and it will aid the user to write Txt2tags, TeX, HTML and others
from Tinn-R in graphical mode. In the current version only Txt2tags
interface was implemented.
•
The structure of the Tinn.ini file was a bit reworked. So, the old back-
ups will not be compatible anymore with this and future versions.
This version will recognize the basic old system configurations, but
not all preferences. Sorry for the inconvenience.
•
The main menu View/Tools was a bit reworked and has new re-
sources.
•
The Tools window has now a new pop-up. It enables you to choose
the visible pages:
1.19.1.12 (Feb/11/2007)
•Search and Replace interface was a bit reworked.
1.19.1.11 (Feb/07/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the prior version and R toolbar (flicker) was
fixed.
1.19.1.10 (Feb/04/2007)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
• The Tinn-R card was updated.
•
The Application options interface was a bit reworked and the R
resource visibles was enhanced. Now if this option is not marked, all
Rresources will not be visible.
•
A new option was added to the main menu View: Rresources visible.
A.11. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2007 (26) 225
1.19.1.9 (Jan/25/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A bug related to R toolbar was fixed.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
1.19.1.8 (Jan/24/2007)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
1.19.1.7 (Jan/23/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Bugs related to selection in ’smLine’ mode, were fixed. Many
thanks to SynEdit team.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
• The main component SynEdit was updated to the latest version.
1.19.1.6 (Jan/21/2007)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A bug related to the project interface was fixed.
–
Small bugs, related to the editor in split mode (vertical or hori-
zontal), were fixed.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
1.19.1.5 (Jan/09/2007)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
• Small adjustments were made to the program interface.
1.19.1.4 (Jan/05/2007)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
The use of clipboard between Rand Tinn-R was enhanced. For
example, instructions such as the ones below are now possible:
a <- round(rnorm(1000), 2)
b <- round(rnorm(1000), 2)
c <- round(rnorm(1000), 2)
d <- data.frame(a, b, c)
write.table(d, file="clipboard")
226 WHAT IS NEW?
Tinn-R is frozen until Rreleases the clipboard. Thanks to
Igor Ko-
janov for pointing out the problem and the soluction’s direction.
• In the first use of the program, default options were changed.
• The R/Database interface was reworked:
–
A new option enabling the user to restore the original database
was added.
–
After changes itis necessary to type Save. Otherwise,a ll changes
will be lost when closing the interface.
–The button Save and close was removed.
1.19.1.3 (Jan/04/2007)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
• Menu Rwas a bit reworked.
• Icons were changed.
• In the first use of the program, default options were changed.
•
The R/Database interface was a bit reworked. It now has a new
option enabling the user to restore the original database.
1.19.1.2 (Jan/01/2007)
•
The menu Rwas a bit reworked and now has a new option: Cus-
tomize. It enables the userto customize the files
Rcompletion.r
and
Rconfigure.r
. Before that, administrator privileges were necessary
to personalize these very useful files.
•
The folder where Tinn-R stores its internal files has now a new sub-
folder named custom that stores the files
Rcompletion.r
and
Rcon-
figure.r
. It will be also included in backups of the system configu-
ration.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 227
A.12 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64)
1.19.1.1 (Dec/27/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to version ’1.19.1.0’ and ’midas.dll’ was fixed:
the content of this dll was compiled inside the binary code to
avoid its redistribution.
1.19.1.0 (Dec/26/2006)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
The DBase database (RCard and RTip) was upgraded to the native
XML engine provided by Borland. It is very small, stable and fast.
–
Therefore, do not restore the database from old versions to the
new ones.
–It will be easier to integrate Rand Tinn-R in the future.
1.19.0.18 (Dec/13/2006)
•
The Print resource was a bit reworked: it will always close the print
dialogue after pressing the Print option.
• The Application options was a bit reworked.
• Two non-configurable shortcuts were added:
1. CTRL + (: insert (or replace) (|)
2. CTRL + ): insert (or replace) ()
•
A new folder named custom was added to the program folders. It con-
tains two customizable files: Rcompletion.r and Rconfigure.r:
1. Rcompletion.r
: allows the user to customize the new auto
completion resource (described below);
2. Rconfigure.r
: allows the user to customize the Rconfigura-
tion.
•
The first approach of auto completion was implemented and the
default keystroke is
CTRL + J
, but the user can customize it in the
Editor options: Options/Main/Editor/Keystrokes. Use it, after any
valid word, by pressing the keystroke. For example:
228 WHAT IS NEW?
if<CTRL + J> to obtain:
if (| < )
ifc<CTRL + J> to obtain:
if(|<){
}
fo<CTRL + J> to obtain:
for (i in 1:i|)
foc<CTRL + J> to obtain:
for (i in 1:|) {
}
sw<CTRL + J> to obtain:
switch(|,
a = ' ',
b = ' ',
)
wh<CTRL + J> to obtain:
i=0
while (i < |) {
i=i+1
}
eq<CTRL + J> to obtain:
\begin{equation}\label{eq_01}
|
\end{equation}
Observations:
1.
Only two letters were used to define simple structures (for
example: fo =for,fu =textitfunction);
2.
Considering the above, letter
c
was added to complete or more
complex structures (for example: foc,fuc);
3.
If there are no conflict among the names in the Rcompletion
file, the first letter is enough. For example: s=swc. If there are
conflicts, it will be necessary to add more letters to complete
the diferentiation;
4.
The
|
symbol is used to define where the cursor will first stop
after the auto completion;
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 229
5.
To better understand it, have a look at the file
Rcompletion.r
within the folder custom where the program was installed and
do your own tests.
1.19.0.17 (Dec/10/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
When both options Organize screen and Return focus were
marked, it triggered a bug, which has been fixed.
1.19.0.16 (Dec/08/2006)
•
The Main menu was reworked and several options now have a better
logic place.
1.19.0.15 (Dec/07/2006)
•
The Main menu was reworked and several options now have a better
logic place.
1.19.0.14 (Dec/06/2006)
• The interfaces Search text and Replace text were reworked.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
It is now possible to increase and decrease (non-permanent) the
font size of any individual file easily:
<SHIFT + CTRL + +> (plus (+) on the numeric keypad): INCREASE (upper limit is 50)
<SHIFT + CTRL + -> (minus (-) on the numeric keypad): DECREASE (lower limit is 1)
1.19.0.13 (Dec/04/2006)
•
All images of the documentation were updated to the latest version.
1.19.0.12 (Dec/04/2006)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
The way as the opened files are closed was enhanced. Now, if any file
was changed and the user chooses Cancel, the current procedure
will be canceled too. For example, closing: projects, all right, all left,
etc.
230 WHAT IS NEW?
1.19.0.11 (Nov/30/2006)
•
The Application options was a bit reworked. Now the user can set
the initialization parameters of Rgui. Set it at Application option-
s/R/General/Rgui (Parameters and path).
1.19.0.10 (Nov/30/2006)
• The Project interface was a bit enhanced.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
1.19.0.9 (Nov/29/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to the Project and associated with the prior ver-
sion of Tinn-R (1.19.0.8) was fixed.
1.19.0.8 (Nov/28/2006)
• The pop-up menus related to the Project, and to the Editor, were a
bit reworked with respect to Put full path in the clipboard option.
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•Search text and Replace text interface were reworked.
1.19.0.7 (Nov/27/2006)
•
If the variable rGuiPreferred is empty (as in the first use) in the ini
file, Tinn-R will check in the Windows registry at HKLM
\
R-core
\
Rto
find the path where Rgui.exe was installed. So, if the user want to
use
Tinn-R with
R
console
, it is no longer necessary to set it in
the Application options.
1.19.0.6 (Nov/23/2006)
•
The command Send line to Rwas enhanced. Now, whenever the
user set it not to send comment lines, and the current line is either
commented or empty, Tinn-R will search below towards the end
of file, for the first not commented or empty line and will send it
automatically. Also, it will always search below towards the end of
the file, for the first not commented or empty line. So, the user’s
work when sending line by line will be reduced.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 231
1.19.0.5 (Nov/21/2006)
•
The Application options was a bit reworked. Now the user can de-
cide whether the position of the Tinn-R and Rgui windows will be
organized automatically or not, when Rgui is running. Set it at Ap-
plication options/R/Organize.
1.19.0.4 (Nov/18/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug associated with the use of
CTRL +
to insert content of
the tip with ’R complex’ and another was fixed.
1.19.0.3 (Nov/17/2006)
•
Now Tinn-R has four multi-highlighters: HTML complex,PHP com-
plex,R complex and Sweave:
1. HTML complex = HTML & JavaScript
2. PHP complex = HTML & JavaScript & PHP
3. R complex = R & URI ('<<<'begin URI '>>>'end URI)
4. Sweave = TeX & R ('>>='begin R '@'end R)
URI : Uniform Resource Identifiers.
R: complex: The main syntax is R, '<<<'and '>>>'the tags enable the user
to insert a block of URI syntax.
Sweave: The main syntax is TeX, '>>='and '@'the tags enable the user
to insert a block of R syntax.
The SynHighlighterURI unit implements an URI syntax highlighter for SynEdit.
Recognition of URIs is based on the information provided in the document
"Uniform Resource Identifiers (URI): Generic Syntax" of "The Internet Society",
that can be found at http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2396.txt.
Also interesting is http://www.freesoft.org/CIE/RFC/1738/33.htm which describes
general URL syntax and major protocols.
These protocols are recognized:
-------------------------------
http://
https://
ftp://
mailto:
news: or news://
nntp://
telnet://
gopher://
prospero://
wais://
232 WHAT IS NEW?
As well as commonly used shorthands:
------------------------------------
someone@somewhere.org
www.host.org
Example of Rcomplex:
# <<< http://www.r-project.org/ >>>
# <<< joseclaudio.faria@terra.com.br >>>
# <<< phgrosjean@sciviews.org >>>
mean(rnorm(100))
or
# <<< http://www.r-project.org/
# joseclaudio.faria@terra.com.br
# phgrosjean@sciviews.org >>>
mean(rnorm(100))
Therefore, by pressing
CTRL
and right button of the mouse on any
valid link, it is possible to follow the link (browser, client of email,
etc).
•
Menu Options was a bit reworked to enable the user to set Ror R
complex as the default syntax.
1.19.0.2 (Nov/09/2006)
•
The option
Automatically configure
R
(Rprofile.site)
was
enhanced. Now the user can now decide whether the changes will
be
temporary
(on the current session only) or
permanent
(editing
automatically the Rprofile.site file). For both, if necessary, the user
can edit (customize) the file Rconfigure.r in the folder doc/English
where Tinn-R is installed. So we think this new resource is now more
powerful and flexible.
•
The Application options was reworked. Now it is possible to set the
position of the Tinn-R window (top, bottom, left or right with respect
to the Rgui).
Left or right positions are recommended only
for very large screens
. Set it at Application options/R/Orga-
nize.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 233
1.19.0.1 (Nov/07/2006)
•
One new option
Automatically configure
R
(Rprofile.site)
was added to the Rmain menu. It will enable the user to automat-
ically configure the Rprofile.site file with all packages which are
necessary to work efficiently. If any of those are not found, Rwill
download and install them when starting.
1.19.0.0 (Nov/06/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Bugs when opening files in Tinn-R by double clicking from
Windows Explorer were fixed. In other words, the interaction
with Windows Explorer was enhanced.
–A bug associated with SHIFT+ESPACE was fixed.
•
Tinn-R has now a new logo/image identity which reflects its natural
evolution.
• The sources codes were deeply remade and optimized.
1.18.7.3 (Oct/30/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug was fixed: from now on, whenever the user starts
R
inside
Tinn-R
, it will open automatically in the
SDI mode
,
otherwise, in the default mode defined in the Rconsole config-
uration file. Also, if any file happens to be open,
and active
,
the
R Working Directory
will be set to its path. Otherwise, it
will be set to the default path (../bin) where Rwas installed.
–
Bugs with TCP/IP protocol (associated with the prior version
1.18.7.2) were fixed: sorry for this. By the way, we would like
to remember the users there are still some unsolved problems
with R output under this protocol. For example, the codes be-
low:
f <- function(x)
x/10 + 1
or,i.e,
any instruction with more than one single line
,
a <- 0
for (i in 1:20) {
a=i
if(a <= 5 ) {
234 WHAT IS NEW?
cat('a = ', a, '(<= 5)'); cat('\n')
next
}
if(a == 18) {
cat('a = ', a, '(= 18)'); cat('\n')
break
}
}
will always generate errors. We’ve been working hardin order to
solve it, but it is not easy! Moreover, consider that this protocol’s
main objective is to be used with Rexplorer interface and
any
other use is still experimental.
1.18.7.2 (Oct/30/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug, when closing the Rgui and the choice of Cancel,
was fixed.
•
The Application options was reworked a little bit. The options en-
abling the user to set Tinn-R to always show Tips and Completion
were removed. We think it was an annoyance. Now, the triggers can
be used to do that.
•
One new function was added both in the R toolbar and the Rmenu:
Toogle start/close. It will enable the user to start/close the preferred
user Rgui.
•
From now on, whenever the user starts
R
inside
Tinn-R
, it will open
automatically in the
SDI mode
, otherwise, in the default mode de-
fined in the Rconsole configuration file. Also, if there is any opened
file, the
R Working Directory
will be set to its path. Otherwise, it
will be set to the default path (../bin) where Rwas installed.
• Several parts of the source code were optimized.
•
The performance of the communication with the R server (under all
protocols) was enhanced. Now the user can to try to set the delay for
computational synchronization (Options/Main/Application/R/R
server) to small values (50, 80 or 100 ms, in harmony with the hard-
ware). We recommend testing different delays until a good perfor-
mance is obtained.
• Icons of Controlling R were remade.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 235
1.18.7.1 (Oct/26/2006)
•
Many cosmetic changes were made to the program’s interface and
documentation.
1.18.7.0 (Oct/25/2006)
•
All the HTML documentation of Tinn-R was easily remade; we be-
came very tired of the blue colour:txt2tags is an exceptional tool!
•
From now on (Enio Jelihovschi - a new Tinn-R member) is respon-
sible for the production and quality of all Tinn-R documentation.
Welcome Enio, we wish you have a good work on board.
•
One new function was added both to the Rtoolbar and the Rmenu:
TCP/IP toggle connetion.
1.18.6.13 (Oct/24/2006)
• Parts of the source code were optimized.
•
Tools/Sort was enhanced: it now enables you to sort by Strings,
Numbers and Dates.
• Popup menu associated with tabs was a bit reworked.
• The speller now will advise whenever it finishes the corrections.
1.18.6.12 (Oct/22/2006)
• Several parts of the source code were optimized.
•
Popup menu associated with the Tabs was enhanced. It now addi-
tionally enables you to close all files located at the
right
or
left
from the active tab.
• Main menu File was a bit remade.
•Popup menu editor was a bit remade.
1.18.6.11 (Oct/20/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A small bug associated with main menu, Tools was fixed.
236 WHAT IS NEW?
1.18.6.10 (Oct/20/2006)
• Several parts of the source code were optimized.
•
Rexplorer performance was enhanced. Now you can to try to set
the delay for computational synchronization (Options/Main/Ap-
plication/R/R server) to small values (50, 80 or 100 ms, in harmony
with your hardware). We recommend testing different delays until
you obtain a good performance.
•
We also recommend you to use the resources of R explorer under
TCP/IP protocol (it makes the Rgui console cleaner). By the way,
there are still some unsolved problems with R output under this
protocol.
• Window About was remade.
1.18.6.9 (Oct/17/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug associated with
CTRL + W
shortcut closing two
files instead of just one, was fixed.
•
The Application options was somehow reworked. When closing it,
the screen will not be organized. Therefore it will be necessary to
toggle it on the main menu View/Organise screen or in the toolbar
Tools.
•
The options Send selection will be enabled only if any selection was
done.
1.18.6.8 (Oct/10/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A small bug associated with Status bar was fixed.
•
The Application options was reworked. It is now possible to set the
position of R(top or bottom) on Organize screen resource by using
Application options/R/General/settings.
• Clipboard actions were enhanced.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 237
1.18.6.7 (Oct/08/2006)
•
A new option Organize screen was added to the menu View and the
button associated to it was added to the bar Tools. This has been,
up to now, an old user’s request, and it enables you to put, in a fast
way, the
R Console on the top
of the screen and the
Tinn-R on
the bottom.
•
Tools/Sort was enhanced: now it maintains the file in the original
Top line position.
•
The way project files (*.tps) are opened was changed: the textual file
(by default) will not be opened anymore. The user, now, can easily
edit the file in the Project interface.
1.18.6.6 (Oct/06/2006)
• A new option Sort was added to menu Tools. This enables the user
to sort an entire file (any selection mode) or selection (for while only
for smNormal and smColumn).
•Popup menu editor was reworked.
• Icons of R explorer were changed.
1.18.6.5 (Oct/03/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug related to Spell, that always broke down when finding
<
or
<-
symbol, was fixed. The origin of this bug was a com-
ponent conflict (hard coded) among the HTML brackets, de-
clared as below:
–A bug associated to Project/Close entire project was fixed.
const
OpenBracket: array[THTMLBracket] of PChar=('<','<!--','<%');
CloseBracket: array[THTMLBracket] of PChar=('>','-->','%>');
and the Rassign symbols:
<-
<<-
->
->>
Therefore, if any file has HTML syntax (with any of those tags
above) all text among the declared brackets is free of speller.
We believe that will work nicely from now on.
238 WHAT IS NEW?
1.18.6.4 (Oct/01/2006)
• The Shortcuts customization interface was reworked.
1.18.6.3 (Sep/29/2006)
•
The Shortcuts customization interface was remade, we think it is
now more user friendly.
•
There is a new button in the interface above, that enables the user
to restore the main default Tinn-R shortcuts.
1.18.6.2 (Sep/28/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug associated with the buttons icons of Tools/R ex-
plorer related with version 1.18.6.1 was fixed.
1.18.6.1 (Sep/28/2006)
•
Version 1.18.6.0 was updated, due to some problems detected in file
default.bin. Accordingly, we
strongly recommended
that, before
using this new version, the user
manually
removes that file. In order
to help the user in finding out where Tinn-R stores all the
ini files
,
a new option was added to the main menu Tools named Ini files.
The default.bin file is located in the sub-folder shortcuts. Therefore,
go to the folder and delete it. Sorry for the inconvenience.
1.18.6.0 (Sep/26/2006)
• Several parts of the source code were optimized.
•
Menu and pop-up menu options were remade and some icons re-
placed/changed.
•
A new option Shortcuts customization was added to the menu Op-
tions. This will enable the user to manage (edit, load and save) all
actions of Tinn-R interface. The latest in use will be always reloaded
when restarting the program.
1.18.5.12 (Sep/15/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A few small bugs pointed out by users were fixed.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 239
1.18.5.12 (Sep/13/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug, which has been happening whenever the user
opens the first file located in the floppy drive and access this
floppy in subsequent files, was fixed.
1.18.5.11 (Sep/12/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug, related to versions 1.18.5.9 and 1.18.5.10, associ-
ated with menu File/Save as, was fixed.
1.18.5.10 (Sep/11/2006)
•
The command Send line to Rwas enhanced. Now, whenever the
user sets it not to send comment lines, and the current is either
commented or empty, Tinn-R will search below to the end of file,
for the first not commented or empty line.
1.18.5.9 (Sep/10/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug associated with dragging files in project interface
was fixed. Before, whenever you changed files among groups
it would not be associated with changes.
•
One new function was added both to the Rtoolbar and the Rmenu:
Set work directory (current file path).
•
The icons associated with Computer interface (Add and Remove
favorite folder) were replaced.
•
Tinn-R now recognizes all valid extensions for any syntax when sav-
ing files. For example, the new valid Rextensions are: *.r, *.Rhistory,
*.q, *.s and *.ssc; so, whenever you type:
–Myfile
- it will be saved as
Myfile.r
(the first extension is the
default);
–Myfile.R
- it will be saved as
Myfile.R
(
R
is a valid extension
and Tinn-R is now case insensitive for that purpose);
–Myfile.Rhistory
- it will be saved as
Myfile.Rhistory
(Rhis-
tory is a valid extension);
240 WHAT IS NEW?
–Myfile.help
- it will be saved as
Myfile.help.r
(
help
it is not
a valid extension and *.r is the default);
–
PS: in order to save any file with any extension, you must
choose All syntax.
•
Whenever the tab file has the focus, a new associated pop-up menu
is available with the following options: Close,Close others and Close
all.
•
The way Tinn-R opens and closes a project, was changed. Now, any
*.tps (from any source) will also be opened in the Project interface
and all files of the project will be closed only and only if you choose
the option Close entire project.
•
The Project interface was isomehow enhanced. Now, the user can
type
DELETE
to delete either groups or files,
INSERT
to add files to
selected groups and
<CTRL +INSERT>
to add the current file to
the selected group.
1.18.5.8 (Ago/03/2006)
•
Tinn-R version 1.18.5.7 was pre-released (restricted to developers
only).
•
The conflict between the Editor option/Alt sets column mode and
the possible user option Format/Selection mode/Column was fixed.
1.18.5.7 (Ago/01/2006)
• A first approximation to build a speller in Tinn-R was made.
• To install this new resource do the following:
1. Close Tinn-R;
2. Download the dictionaries
http://www.luziusschneider.com/Speller/English/index.htm
that you want and install it from the installer (for example IS-
pEnFrGe.exe).
•
It is very simple, works nice, has power and all resources are open-
source.
•
For a while this component did not recognize the main SynEdit
component used for edition. Consequently, it was necessary to do
the spelling in two steps, making the correction in a new page (Spell)
on Results interface.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 241
•Whenever it finds any selection
, the correction will be made
only for it, as well as for subsequent updates (or for subsequent
update).
•
The basic edition resources of the Spell are available in a pop-up
menu.
•
In the meanwhile, please consider this new resource as
still ex-
perimental and under development.
1.18.5.6 (Jun/24/2006)
• The highlighters All and Text were remade.
1.18.5.5 (May/29/2006)
•
Save and Save as were remade. Thank you
John
for the good sugges-
tion.
•
The user can change the selection mode by clicking the mouse any-
where in the Main status bar. The order of the changes is sensitive
to:
–Left
- corresponds to the menu Format/Selection mode
bot-
tom to top order;
–Right - correspond to top to bottom order.
•
Tinn-R now recognizes the RGUI JGR. In the meanwhile, please
consider it as still experimental.
1.18.5.4 (May/28/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Small bugs (detected in version 1.18.5.3) were fixed.
1.18.5.3 (May/27/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Small bugs (detected in prior versions) were fixed:
Open PDF files;
Appearance of the panel Results;
Icons association from the pop-up menu RCard.
• Small changes were made to the icons.
•
A single click mouse in the editor gutter now selects the entire line.
242 WHAT IS NEW?
• Window About was reworked.
•
Window Credits (previously called Information) was updated to
reflect the lastest changes.
•
The echo of the instructions sent to Rinterpreter (visible in R output
window) is now optional in Tinn-R. In order to set it up, you can
mark/unmark the option R output echo on in Options/Main/Ap-
plication/R/General/Settings. If it is marked the Routput window
will show the instructions (not for all options of send to R) and the
Routput. Please, remember that all these resources are
still ex-
perimental and not too interactive.
1.18.5.2 (May/22/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Small icon changes and bugs corrections.
1.18.5.1 (May/20/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug related with reload was fixed. Many thanks to
Michael Prager for pointing this out to us.
–A couple of small bugs (pointed out by users) were fixed.
•
Tinn-R versions 1.18.4.6 and 1.18.5.0 were considered pre-released
(restricted to developers only).
•
All icons were changed. Thanks to
Philippe
for the hard work of its
selection and organization. We hope you like this new look.
• All syntax are now alphabetically ordered.
•
Whenever the user chooses Save or Save as Tinn-R will to try to
recognize the active syntax and the related file extension.
•
The images of the files ReadMe.html,LizesMoi.html,LeiaMe.html
and LeaMe.html were changed so that they reflect the latest changes.
• Several parts of the source code were optimized.
•Editor options interface was a bit reworked.
• The Search in files and R output interface were reworked.
• Menu Rwas a bit reworked.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 243
•
Now, the user can choose which Rresources, related to Send to R and
Controlling R, will be visible. To do that, two options are available:
Application options/R/R menu and toolbar and a pop-up menu
associated to Rtoolbar.
1.18.4.5 (Apr/07/2006)
•
The recommendation that, under Windows XP, the user should con-
figure the appearance of windows and buttons to
Classic style
of Windows
(
not for XP style)
is no longer used. In other words,
the old conflict among the XPMenu component that Tinn-R uses
and Windows the XP skins was fixed.
1.18.4.4 (Apr/02/2006)
•
The menu Help was reworked and new options were added to it.
The basic idea is to show how the
HTML
files are created by using
the tool converter
txt2tags
and, the most important, it now en-
ables the users
to help us with the constructions and cor-
rections of these files
. So, sorry for any language mistake, but
my native language (JosÃ
©
Cláudio Faria) is not English and I don’t
want to annoy anyone, anymore, with English corrections. If pos-
sible, please help us, because these documents could be useful to
many other users.
•
Tool Computer has now two new buttons that enables the user to
add and remove favorite folders.
•
Application options interface was reworked. Now it enables user to
set how the DOS console will be shown for compilation.
•
As a consequence, the Tools menu and Processing toolbar also have
the related options.
•
For both file compilation (’.tex’ to ’.dvi’) or (’.tex’ to ’.pdf’) whenever
the Open always after compilation (option)
is marked
, Tinn-R will
freeze while waiting for the MikTeX compilation to open the com-
piled file, in the other way it will not. In another words, whenever
the Open always after compilation (option)
isn’t checked
Tinn-R
will not freeze and the user can continue normally his job.
•
Tinn-R now is closed with
//Yap (Yet Another Previewer)// as
DVI viewer
, because it is the default released with MikTeX distri-
bution, and it is a very nice and fast DVI viewer. Tinn-R will open
only a single instance of the Yap, but allowing as many files as the
user whishes.
244 WHAT IS NEW?
•
If the useruses the function utils:::setWindowTitle(paste("-",getwd()))
in Rprofile.site, Tinn-R still recognizes Rgui in SDI mode (it was not
the case in previous versions between 1.18.X.X and 1.18.4.3).
1.18.4.3 (Mar/28/2006)
•
Tinn-R versions 1.18.3.1, 1.18.3.2, 1.18.4.0, 1.18.4.1 and 1.18.4.2 were
considered pre-released (restricted to developers only).
• The structure of the Tinn-R ini files was changed again:
..\Tinn-R : ReadMe.txt file;
..\Tinn-R\data : dbRcard.dbf, dbRcard.dbt, dbRCard.ndx, dbRtip.dbf,
dbRtip.dbt, dbRTip.ndx and ReadMe.txt files;
..\Tinn-R\ini : Shortcuts.tinn, Tinn.ini and ReadMe.txt
..\Tinn-R\ini\colors : customColors.ini and ReadMe.txt
..\Tinn-R\ini\syntax : C#.ini, C++.ini, ... , XML.ini and ReadMe.txt;
..\Tinn-R\ini\syntax bkp : temporary syntax file and ReadMe.txt;
..\Tinn-R\syntax : deplate.xml, txt2tags.xml and ReadMe.txt.
..\Tinn-R\temp : temporary files.
So, the old backups will not be compatible anymore with this and future
versions. This version will recognize the basic old system configurations, but
not all syntax preferences. Sorry for the inconvenience, but, it was necessary.
From now on, Tinn-R will make real system (all ini files) backup of your
settings and preferences.
•
Two useful tools for file conversion were added: deplate and txt2tags.
For deplate, the extension
.dlpt
was proposed, and for txt2tags
Tinn-R recognizes
.t2t
. The basic highlighters, based on XML, were
proposed for both.
We hope users can help us in the devel-
opment
. Also, the interface for syntax colors preferences for both
are different from the already known Tinn-R interface. So, please
consider that it is working nicely, but that it will be temporary.
•
Tinn-R now enables you to compile
LaTeX
files with MikTeX and
view the
DVI
and
PDF
results (Yap and Acrobat) and also to see
HTML
files in your preferred browser starting from Tinn-R.
• Application options interface was reworked. It now enables you to
set the basic preferences for file conversion, file compilation and
viewers.
•
As a consequence the Tools menu and toolbar have new options to
file conversion, compilations and file view.
•
All help files were changed from ’.txt’ to ’.html’ using the new txt2tags
tool inside Tinn-R: we hope you like the new resources.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 245
• Several parts of the source code were optimized.
• Menu Web was reworked.
• Menu Help was reworked.
1.18.3.0 (Mar/16/2006)
• The structure of the Tinn-R ini files was changed:
..\Tinn-R : ReadMe.txt file;
..\Tinn-R\data : dbRcard.dbf, dbRcard.dbt, dbRCard.ndx, dbRtip.dbf,
dbRtip.dbt, dbRTip.ndx and ReadMe.txt files;
..\Tinn-R\ini : Shortcuts.tinn, Tinn.ini and ReadMe.txt
..\Tinn-R\ini\colors : customColors.ini and ReadMe.txt
..\Tinn-R\ini\syntax : C#.ini, C++.ini, ... , XML.ini and ReadMe.txt;
..\Tinn-R\ini\syntax bkp : temporary syntax file and ReadMe.txt;
..\Tinn-R\temp : temporary files.
Therefore, old backups will not be compatible with this and next versions
anymore. This version will recognizes the basic old system configurations,
but not the syntax preferences. Sorry for the inconvenience, but they were
necessary. From now on, Tinn-R will make real system (all ini files) backup of
your settings and preferences.
•
Syntax color preferences interface was reworked and it has new op-
tions.
•
Tinn-R has three multi-highlighters: Sweave, HTMLcomplex and
PHPcomplex:
1. Sweave =TeX & R
2. HTML complex =HTML & JavaScript
3. PHP complex =HTML & JavaScript & PHP
These highlighters have no priorities when you set the syntax color pref-
erences. Thus, if you change the color preferences of any of these multi-
highlighters (Sweave, HTML complex and PHP complex) these settings will
be valid only in the current Tinn-R session and will not be saved when Tinn-R
is closed. So, if you want to make permanent changes, set the preferences
from all simple highlighters (R, TeX, HTML, JavaScript and PHP).
• Menu Option/Syntax was reworked.
• A lot of the source code was optimized.
•
All Tinn-R color dialogs were reworked and they automatically save
and recover all preferred colors.
246 WHAT IS NEW?
1.18.2.1 (Mar/08/2006)
• Some aspects of Syntax color preferences interface were optimized.
•
Replace text and Search text interface now recognize if more than
one text line was selected and set the option Selected text only auto-
matically.
1.18.2.0 (Mar/06/2006)
•
Now Tinn-R has three multi-highlighters: Sweave, HTMLcomplex
and PHPcomplex:
1. Sweave =TeX & R
2. HTMLcomplex =HTML & JavaScript
3. PHPcomplex =HTML & JavaScript & PHP
These highlighters have no priorities when you set the syntax color pref-
erences. Thus, if you change color preferences of any of these simple high-
lighters (Sweave, HTMLcomplex or PHPcomplex) these settings will be valid
only in the current Tinn-R session and will not be saved when Tinn-R is
closed. So, if you want to make permanent changes, set the preferences of
all these simple highlighters (TeX, R, HTML, JavaScript and PHP) from the
multi-highlighters (Sweave, HTMLcomplex and PHPcomplex) respectively.
• Several parts of the source code were optimized.
•Tools/Project interface was reworked; now it has new resources.
1.18.1.10 (Feb/18/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug with Sweave highlighter related to color prefer-
ences was fixed. In fact,Sweave highlighteris a multi-highlighter
made from prior Rand TeX highlighters. So, if you set the color
of the background to all TeX elements (comment, space, etc)
with the same color (gray for example), you can get the Sweave
syntax with two background colors: one for TeX (gray) and
another to R(white).
–A small bug with View/Line numbers was fixed.
1.18.1.9 (Feb/18/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug with menu Edit/Undo and Edit/Redo was fixed.
Many thanks to users for pointing this out.
A.12. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2006 (64) 247
–
A small bug with menu Edit/Undo and Edit/Redo was fixed.
Many thanks to users for pointing this out.
•
Sweave syntax highlighter was added to Tinn-R with .rnw and .snw
extensions. For Tinn-R the delimiters are:
>>= start a R block
@ close it.
•
Sweave provides a flexible framework for mixing text and S code for
automatic document generation. A single source file contains both
documentation text and S code, which are then woven into a final
document containing:
1. The documentation text together with
2. The S code and/or
3.
The output of the code (text, graphs) by running the S code
through an S engine like R.
Hence, the full power of LaTeX (for high-quality typesetting) and S (for
data analysis) can be used simultaneously. For more information see
?Sweave
from R.
•
All combo-box related with files and extensions were reworked and
now they are simpler.
1.18.1.8 (Feb/12/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Small bug with Copy of pop-up menu R card was fixed.
–A couple of small bugs (pointed out by users) were fixed.
• Main menu Help and Web were reworked.
• Tinn-R and SciViews-R GUI performance was enhanced.
•
Small correction with R explorer interface related to enabled/dis-
abled options.
•
Two new options were added to menus Rand R toolbar:Edit and
Fix. These options enable you to edit or to fix Robjects (if they exist
in the Renvironment).
1.18.1.7 (Jan/14/2006)
•
Small correction with R card and R explorer interface related to
enabled/disabled options.
248 WHAT IS NEW?
1.18.1.6 (Jan/10/2006)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Small bugs pointed out by users were fixed. Many thanks users!
•
A new option GUI Wiki was added to menu Web/R-information
on line. This Wiki was designed mainly to deal with Rbeginners
problems. Although we would like to emphasize the use RGUIs
(Graphical User Interfaces), this Wiki is not restricted to those GUIs:
one can also deal with command-line approaches. Thus, the main
idea is to have material contributed by both beginners, and by more
advanced Rusers, that will help novices or casual R users.
•
In menus Rand R toolbar the position of the buttons was a little
changed for a more logical arrangement; additionally, some icons
were changed and a new and very useful option was added: Example.
• Print/preview, Rexplorer and Rcard Interfaces were reworked.
•
Under TCP/IP some functions to Controlling R were reworked,which
are now more user friendly.
•
Horizontal and vertical splits were deeply reworked. Now they are
more userfriendly. In consequence,the main menu View was changed.
•
The pop-up menu of the open files was enhanced and two new
options were added: Close all and Close others. The Close others was
also added to the Main menu File. The first enables you to close all
files and the second, all files except the active (current) one. Please
note that both will be enabled only if two or more files are open.
• A lot of procedures and functions were optimized.
1.18.1.5 (Jan/01/2006)
•
A Tinn-R card, Help/Tinn-R card (PDF), was added to the project.
Many thanks to Suresh Krishna.
•
New interface/options for printing, which now enables you to print
preview with new resources. In consequence, menu File/Print pre-
view was removed.
A.13. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25) 249
A.13 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25)
1.18.1.4 (Dec/24/2005)
• The extensions ’*.s’ and ’*.ssc’ were added to Rsyntax.
•
New interface/options for printing,which now enables you to choose
the file’s printing range: All, Selection and Pages.
1.18.1.3 (Dec/17/2005)
•
The changes (since Tinn-R 1.17.2.6) have been considered stabi-
lized.
•
A new option R syntax as default was added to the main options and
menu Options. It enables you to choose if a new file and file without
extension will be opened for edition with Ror General syntax as
default.
1.18.1.2 beta (Dec/11/2005)
•
Tinn-R version 1.18.1.1 BETA was considered pre-released (restricted
to beta testers only). Many thanks to all testers.
•
The pop-up menu of the R explorer was enhanced and new options
were added.
• You can now drag and drop objects from the R explorer to editor.
• Many procedures and functions were optimized.
1.18.1.1 beta (Dec/03/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug with the install program (related to desktop short-
cut creation) was fixed. The old shortcut was pointing to Tinn-
R.exe.manifest file and not to Tinn-R.exe.
•
An experimental Rexplorer was added to the program. This was
accomplished by adding a new tab named R explorer to the panel
Tools; it enables you to see Robjects from Tinn-R. Meanwhile, this
explorer must be updated by the user because it is not automatically
done by the Rserver. It was based on the SciViews Rexplorer, but it
is not exactly the same.
•
The speed of the procedures/updates with the panel Tools:Com-
puter and Project, were enhanced.
250 WHAT IS NEW?
•
A new option Send to R was added to the pop-up menu of Project. It
enables you to send the whole project, individual groups or individ-
ual files to the server without opening it for edition.
•
A new menu option was added to the Rmenu: Server: connections
and tests. This menu will open a new window of the program that
allows you to connect and test Ras server using TCP/IP and DDE
protocol.
–
The window Application options was somehow reworked to
reflectthe new features of the program (specially TCP/IP proto-
col to communicate with Rserver). This resource is still experi-
mental and, under tests, it shows instability. So, if any problem
occurs, disconnect the server Server: connections and tests and
all new resources (using another option - DDE and/or tempo-
rary files) will work. In the future the use of TCP/IP protocol
by Tinn-R will be enhanced.
• An experimental code completion was added. For a basic use:
1. Set the options on Application options;
2.
Like Tip, if you check Always shown, after the data object type
and ’$’ related completion will be shown;
3.
Select the desired completion and press ENTER to make it
work.
A tip: my preferred shortcuts are: ``CTRL + D`` for tip after //(//
and ``CTRL + SHIFT + D`` after '$'for code completion.
•
A new menu option was added to the View menu: R output. This
menu will open a new window on the bottom of the program that
allows you to receive the output of the Ras server using only TCP/IP
protocol. It is still experimental.
•
The communication with Runder DDE protocol was enhanced: it
is now faster and more stable.
•
Tool Computer now allows you to open (with double click or drag
and drop) any type of files, and no only the ones recognized.
• Two new syntax highlighters were added to Tinn-R:
1. Fortran: useful to Rdevelopers;
2. Visual basic: still lives.
•
A new pop-up menu was added to the list view of Tools Computer
that enables you to refresh and to choose the view style.
• Many procedures and functions were optimized.
A.13. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25) 251
1.17.2.6 (Oct/27/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug related to On top was checked and Tinn-R some-
times minimizes and others times it doesn’t (hides in the task-
bar), was fixed. Many thanks to
Mihai Nica
for pointing that
out.
1.17.2.5 (Oct/25/2005)
•
The memory use increases (16 k every second) related to some prior
versions was fixed. Many thanks to users for pointing this out.
•
The SynEdit.pas unit component was updated to the latest version
1.428 2005/10/07 21:16:10. So, gutter width was always calculated
using editor font was fixed.
•
Shortcut for Format/Block/Mark was changed from
CTRL + ALT +
Bto CTRL + ALT + S.
1.17.2.4 (Oct/08/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug with Options/Syntax/Color preferences related to
Cancel option was fixed.
•
The TeX highlighter was a little reworked: now it matches brackets.
Thanks Sheldon Kelly for suggest it.
•
The Restore procedure was a little changed: it now checks if any file
or project was changed (and not saved) prior to restart the program.
•
The database was a little reworked. So, if you had any old Tinn-R
version installed, we recommend that you restore the data from this
version. To do this, select Tools/Restore/Database from the main
menu and choose the data folder where Tinn-R was just installed,
as a prior backup.
• Main program icon was a little changed (the Ris now darker).
1.17.2.3 (Oct/03/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug with database (related with version 1.17.2.2 only)
was fixed.
252 WHAT IS NEW?
1.17.2.2 (Oct/02/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A bug with messages below:
"Severe problem! The program cannot be initiated. Please, contact the
developers."
"Access violation at address 'hexa number'in module 'Tinn-R'. Read address
'hexa number'."
It was now fixed. This bug was related to more than one file were selected
from the explorer to be opened and Tinn-R was not running.
So, if Tinn-R is not running (if and only if), avoid to make it because it
will open one instance of Tinn-R and one file (the first in alphabetic
order) only. BTW, if Tinn-R is running, you can select simultaneously any
desired number of files.
–
A small bug when you dida global replace in Tinn-R, i.e., Search/Re-
place/OK/Yes to all, and get the following error message: As-
sertion failure (D:
\
...
\
SynEdit.pas, line 1460), was fixed: thanks
John!
•
Tinn-R versions 1.17.1.2 and 1.17.2.1 were considered pre-released
(restricted to beta testers only). Many thanks to all testers.
• The picture, when opening the program, doesn’t appear anymore.
•
Main program icon was changed: I hope you like the new one. BTW,
I got problems because some parts of the Windows showed the old
icon and others the new. I spent a lot of time to find the original
problem: ShellIconCache.
SO, IF YOU GET INCORRECT ICON DISPLAYED ON WINDOWS, AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW
VERSION OF TINN-R, PLEASE, READ THE INSTRUCTIONS BELOW:
For acceleration of the show of the icons Windows stores images in the ICON
CACHE (ShellIconCache) a hidden icon cache file in your windows directory.
Sometimes the icon of the object changes, but Windows shows the old icon
instead of the former one. To solve this problem we suggest to use the
program IconChanger (shareware available at http://www.shelllabs.com/).
If you have just installed Tinn-R with new icon but Windows has not changed
the image, the guide advises you to choose REBUILD ICON CACHE and if
it will not help then choose REMOVE ICON CACHE.
If you have chosen REBUILD the icon cache will start reconstructing at
once. If you have chosen REMOVE, you will see the warning message.
Choose YES, and then you should restart your computer.
A.13. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25) 253
•
If Tinn-R is closed when maximized, when restarted, it will open
maximized but it will remember the last position when not maxi-
mized.
•
A new shortcut
CTRL + ENTER
was added. When pressed, Tinn-R
sends the current line (entire) to Rinterpreter and adds a line break
at cursor position.
• A new toolbar with Undo and Redo was added.
•
A new button was added to the Misc toolbar that allows you to
choose how Tinn-R will behave after sending anything to Rinter-
preter, if checked, the focus will return to Tinn-R.
•
The function Clear all was updated and it is now faster. If any prob-
lem occur with different machines and OS, please, tell us.
•
The menu Web was a little reworked and a new option is available:
Web/Tinn-R with links to home page (sciViews), sourceforge server
and check for update (from sciViews server).
•
A new menu option Help/Tinn-R citation was added. It enables you
to put the Tinn-R citation in the clipboard.
•
After restoring the configurations file, Tinn-R now can close and
restart itself.
1.17.1.1 (Aug/28/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A small bug with recent files was fixed.
•
Tinn-R versions 1.16.1.9 beta and 1.16.1.10 beta were considered
pre-released (restricted to beta testers only): thanks to all testers.
•
The SynEdit component was updated to the latest version (v2.0.1
beta).
•
The windows Application options and Editor options were a little
reworked.
• The main menu File was a little reworked.
1.16.1.8 (Aug/07/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–A small bug with restore database was fixed.
254 WHAT IS NEW?
1.16.1.7 (Aug/05/2005)
•
Tinn-R version 1.16.1.6 beta was considered pre-released (restricted
to beta testers only): thanks to all testers.
•
The R highlighter was a little reworked: identifiers with the minus
signal ’-’ (ex: codes-deprecated) will not be recognized, any more.
•
Tinn-R team has a new member working on the source code: wel-
come Huashan Chen.
•
Tinn-R project (source and bin) is now also available from Source-
Forge. Thanks Huashan.
•
The incompatibility of Tinn-R with WinNT 4.0/SP6 has been solved.
Thanks Uwe.
•
In R toolbar the position of the buttons was a little changed for a
more logical arrangement.
•
After installation, the Tinn-R/data folder contains data.zip (102 KB).
When starting Tinn-R, the files it contains are automatically un-
packed, and for each user four files are generated: dbRcard.dbf,
dbRcard.dbt, dbRtip.dbf and dbRtip.dbt plus two (dbRcard.ndx and
dbRtip.ndx) index files. This way, each user has an independent
database.
• Also, now each user has independent configurations files.
•
Considering the two topics above, Tinn-R is now multiuser. So, for
instance, you can have an administrator account with full access
to all files for installing programs and maintaining the machine.
But for everyday work, you can log in as
main user
or
normal user
(with restricted access) and run Tinn-R without problems in those
restricted environments. This feature is very useful to educational
purposes in statistical laboratories.
• Only three folders are generated by Tinn-R for each user:
–Windows XP:
Drive:
\
Documents and settings
\
UserName
\
Application data
\
Tinn-R
\
ini
\
with two files Tinn.ini and Shortcuts.tinn;
Drive:
\
Documents and settings
\
UserName
\
Application data
\
Tinn-R
\
data
\
with six database files (see above);
Drive:
\
Documents and settings
\
UserName
\
Application data
\
Tinn-R
\
temp
for essential temp files (will be automatically removed by Tinn-R after
each session).
–Windows NT:
Driver:\Winnt\Profiles\UserName\Application data\Tinn-R\ini;
A.13. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25) 255
Driver:\Winnt\Profiles\UserName\Application data\Tinn-R\data;
Driver:\Winnt\Profiles\UserName\Application data\Tinn-R\temp.
•
The database component (TDBF) was updated to the latest version.
•
Menu Tools was reworked a little and new options were added to
backup/restore your personal database and configuration files.
1.16.1.5 (Jul/15/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug with project (Save and Save as), related to auto-
matic extension ’.tps’, was fixed.
•
Tinn-R now works with Rin MDI mode if the device graphic is max-
imized with no more limitations of the number of device graphic,
as pointed in the Tinn-R 1.15.1.7 (07 Apr 2005).
•
If you use the function utils:::setWindowTitle(paste("-",getwd())) in
Rprofile, Tinn-R still recognizes Rgui (was not the case in previous
versions).
•
A new menu option (and respective button and hotkey) was added
to the main menu: R/Controlling R/List structure of selected variable
that allows you to list the structure of any Robject/variable.
•
A new menu (and respective pop-up menu) was added to the main
menu: File/Put full path in clipboard. This option allows you to put
the full path of the file in the clipboard with two options: Unix mode
(../..) or Windows (..\..) (useful to get full path of data files).
•
In R toolbar the position of the buttons were a little changed for a
more logical arrangement.
• The menu Format/Block was a little reworked.
1.16.1.4 (May/29/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Small bug with Send marked block was corrected.
–Small bug with Search and Search in files were corrected.
•
A new button was added to the Misc toolbar that allow you unmark
all marks.
• Menu Format was reworked a little bit.
256 WHAT IS NEW?
1.16.1.3 beta (May/22/2005)
•
Tinn-R versions 1.15.1.8, 1.15.1.9, 1.15.1.10, 1.15.1.11, 1.16.1.1 and
1.16.1.2 were considered pre-released (restricted to beta testers
only).
•
The Tinn-R installer now proposes to associate Tinn-R with ’.Rd’
files (the Rhelp source code).
• The menu Format was changed. There are now two new options:
1. Format/Block/Mark;
2. Format/Block/Unmark.
The first menu allows you to select a given block of code (line start and line
end) to send it at once to the Rinterpreter and the last menu entry allows you
to clear an existing marked block. Bookmark
0
is used to mark the beggining
of a marked block and bookmark
1
is used to mark its end. Unmark remove
them only if they were marked with the Block/Mark tool. Otherwise, they are
treated as simple bookmarks. Note that, whatever the way you defined them,
you can always change their position as usual. There is a distinct marked
block defined for each open file, and the tools are enabled only if a block is
marked for the current active document.
•
As a consequence the Rmenu and toolbar have new tools to send
the marked block at once R/Send to R/Marked block (source) or line
by line R/Send to R/Marked block to the Rinterpreter.
•
Another new tool was also added to send the current selected text
as a source file to R(and not line by line, as usual).
•
The Main toolbar was a little reworked to support the new mark
block option.
•
The accuracy of all functions (send to, or, control R) interacting with
Rwas enhanced.
•
The stability of the databases, respect to duplication of keys, was
enhanced.
•
The option Spanish was added to the menu Help/From this version.
It contains:
1. Lea me.html;
2. FAQ.txt;
3. Palabras reconocidas.r.
The translation was made by
Jairo Cugliari
: thanks
Jairo
,
very much!
A.13. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25) 257
•
ARcard was added to the program. This was accomplished by
adding a new tab named R card to the panel Tools. The Rcard was
based on two Rcard already published: R/Rpad Reference Card by
Tom Short and Rreference card by Jonathan Baron.
1. It was made using a user-expandable database (DBase);
2.
The component used is named TDBF, it is free (open source),
does not use BDE and it is not necessary to have the database
server. The DB engine code is compiled right into the Tinn-
R executable. TDBF is a native data access component for
Delphi, BCB, Kylix and FreePascal. More information can be
found here.
•
As a consequence, the Rmenu was a little reworked. You have now
two options for the databases:
1. R/Database/Tip for tip management;
2. R/Database/Card for Rcard management.
•
A freeware resource provided by
Angus Johnson
was added to the
program. It is a very useful Generic Diff Format (GDIFF) named
TextDiff. The GDIFF format can be used to efficiently describe the
differences between two arbitrary files or folders. The format does
not make any assumptions about the type or contents of the files,
and thus can be used to describe the differences between text files
as well as binary files. The work was made adapting the sources
code of the demo project of the component to the Tinn-R project:
thanks Angus, very much!
•
As a consequence, the Tools menu has a new tool: Tools/Differences.
•
Tinn-R is now more flexible if the screen is split: the functions Send
to R and Controlling R works for both (top or below, left or right)
frames.
• The Ascii chart is now more flexible.
•
The menu Format/Selection mode was reworked, new and use-
ful shortcuts were added (see in Main/Editor/Keystrokes): thanks
Zoltan Butt.
•
A new field (third field from left) was added to the status bar with
three possible values corresponding to the current selection state
of the editor:
1. smNormal : selection in normal mode;
2. smLine : selection in line mode;
258 WHAT IS NEW?
3. smColumn : selection in column mode.
•
The files Tinn-R_Read me.html,Tinn-R_Leia me.html (in Portuguese)
and Tinn-R_Lisez moi.html (in French) in the \doc subdirectory of
Tinn-R were updated.
• Seven new syntax highlighters were added to Tinn-R:
1. Rd files (based on the existing TeX highlighter);
2. Tcl/Tk;
3. Ruby;
4. TeX;
5. Python;
6. Bat;
7. HP48.
•
The picture, when opening the program, was changed. Tinn-R pro-
gram is searching for a new logo/image identity. This "tinny" (two
n intentionally), but colorful bird, is a good symbol for the "tinny"
Tinn-R, but rich in nice features regarding the edition of Rcode!
• The program user interface was reworked a little bit.
• Two hotkeys were changed:
<ALT+LEFT> : Tools align left;
<ALT+RIGHT> : Tools align Right.
•
The automatic extensions for all Save action was improved. Now, if
you select All files (*.*) you can save the file with any desired exten-
sion or even with no extension at all. Thanks Posta Giovanni.
•
The structure of the Tip database was improved. The tip is not lim-
ited to 254 characters anymore, because it is now of memo type.
1.15.1.7 (Apr/07/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Minor bug with View/Toolbars/Macro was corrected.
•
Tinn-R now works with Rin MDI mode if the device graphic is max-
imized:
1. You can work with 1..11 device graphic ACTIVE maximized;
2. You can work with 1..10 device graphic inactive maximized.
A.13. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25) 259
The caption of \RR{} can be:
RGui - [R Graphics: Device 1..11 (ACTIVE)] or
RGui - [R Graphics: Device 1..10 (inactive)]
•
The state of the Caps Lock key (keyboard) doesn’t influence any
more the Send to R and Controlling R functions.
•
Tools/Project interface was improved with the replacement of the
combo-box by a new dropdown button.
•
A new toolbar named Tools with two buttons (Toggle tools visible and
Align tools right/left) was added to the main toolbar,in consequence
the pop-up Tools was removed.
•Project/Recent is now checking for changes in current project.
• The View/Tabs icon was changed.
•
The delay for DDE communication with R(for call tips) is now user-
selectable in the Options/Main/Application dialog box (you need
to load svIDE package from SciViews bundle to use this feature).
If Tinn-R seems to freeze and you got no call tip, just increase the
delay.
•
Menu Web and Help were a little reworked and new information in
French and Portuguese were added.
1.15.1.6 beta (Mar/19/2005)
• Open files in Tinn-R with Tools panel was reworked:
1. A file must have no extension or one that Tinn-R recognizes;
2. If the file is not opened there, you can open a copy by double
clicking or dragging it into the main form;
3.
With file already opened, you can now open a copy by double
clicking or dragging it in the editor area in Tinn-R;
4.
You can drag a project (all files of the project will be opened),
a group (all files of the group will be opened) or an individual
file.
•
A new pop-up menu is available for Tools. This menu is related with
visibility and position of the Tools panel.
• The menu Options and View were reworked.
260 WHAT IS NEW?
1.15.1.5 beta (Mar/17/2005)
•
Project interface was a little reworked and two new options were
added: Expand all and Collapse all groups.
1.15.1.4 beta pre-release (Mar/12/2005)
•
Application options was reworked and an option Delay for syn-
chronization was added. Because DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange)
through tcltk and svIDE packages consumes a certain time - that is
variable between different computers - this option allows the user
to customize the Tinn-R delay with the Ras server with call-tip. So, it
is very important to adjust this delay until getting high functionality
and performance.
•Project interface was reworked:
1. Only the file names are showen (no more full paths);
2. All nodes of the project can be dragged:
a) If you drag a project all file will be opened;
b) If you drag a group all files of this group will be opened;
c) if you drag a single file it will be opened.
•
The Search results interface was reworked and two old bugs (all
versions of Tinn-R that I don’t knew) were fixed.
• In Tools panel/Computer a double click on the Tinn-R project files
(*.tps) will open the project interface. On the other hand, if you drag
this file, the context of the project file will be opened for manual
edition.
1.15.1.3 beta pre-release (Mar/06/2005)
• Changes to projects are monitored now.
• To open files in Tinn-R with Tools panel:
1. A file must have no extension or one that Tinn-R recognizes;
2.
If the file is not opened there, you still can drag it into the main
form;
3.
If any file is already opened, you can open a copy by double
clicking or dragging it to the page control or to the main menu.
•
The Rhighlight dictionary was updated and about 270 new func-
tions were added to be compatible with Rparameters completion
proposal (RPCP) database.
A.13. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25) 261
1.15.1.2 beta pre-release (Mar/05/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Small (and old) bug with painted symbols ’(’, ’[’, ’{’ inside the
gutter was corrected: thanks Marco!
•
A new folder named res with a single file (Tinn-R_img.bmp) was
added to the Tinn-R program.
• The Tinn-R binary is about 350 Kb smaller than version 1.15.1.1.
• The About box was reworked.
•
The project combo box was reworked. It is not possible to drag it
any more.
•
RegEx was reworked: it is now possible to paste clipboard and use
carriage return in it.
•
It is now possible to place the Tools panel at right or left of the main
window.
• Two new hotkeys were added (not user-configurable):
<CTRL + ALT + LEFT> : Tools align left;
<CTRL + ALT + RIGHT> : Tools align Right.
•
It is possible to dock the Rtoolbar only at the opposite side of the
Tools panel, not on the same side.
1.15.1.1 beta pre-release (Mar/01/2005)
•
A picture was added when opening the program. Thanks
Carolina
(my daughter) for basic art creation.
•
A new file was added to the project: Tinn-R_shortcuts.txt. It is possi-
ble to load the file from Help/Tinn-R/Shortcuts.
•
Open dialog for Open file and Add file to project now allow the
selection of multiple files.
•
The database was reworked and a new information (location) was
added.
• Tab order of the search/replace interface was reworked.
262 WHAT IS NEW?
•
Due to the growth of the code source, it is not possible any more to
maintain Tinn-R code synchronized with the original Tinn project.
So, Tinn-R is now a new open source project. The version numbers
is thus changed. The new convention is: AA.BB.CC.DD S/B
That is, AA : major version
BB : minor version
CC : release
DD : build
more : beta or pre-release version
• The status bar was reworked.
• A new menu Web was added.
• The About dialog box was reworked.
• The menu Project was completely reworked.
•
New panel named Tools (with two tabs: Computer and Project) was
added. This feature will grow up to enhance the interaction with
Rinterpreter (progressive inclusion of SciViews-R dock Window
feature like the object explorer).
•
A new hotkey (not user-configurable) was added:
CTRL + /
(divide
on the numeric keypad) show/hide the Tools panel.
•
Second version of the Rparameters completion proposal (call-tip).
It now works with a user-expandable database (DBase) and with a
Rserver (DDE - Dynamic Data Exchange through tcltk and svIDE
packages). That is, this version communicates with Rto get Rfunc-
tion arguments directly if a function is not defined in the database.
We thus have: database (priority 1) and Rserver (priority 2). To use
the Rserver, the package svIDE (SciViews bundle) must be loaded
in the current Rsession.
0.0.9.4 r1.15 beta 2 (Feb/11/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Small bug with
CTRL + Y
(delete entire line),
CTRL + T
(delete
word right from cursor) and
CTRL + SHIFT + Y
(delete words
from cursor to the end of line) that did not enable the save
options, was corrected.
•
The position of the cursor is now preserved when using
CTRL + *
(multiply on the numeric keypad) to insert/replace text with param-
eters of the current Rfunction.
A.13. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2005 (25) 263
• Send line now works when the cursor is on the end the line.
0.0.9.3 r1.15 beta 1 (Feb/11/2005)
•
The problem with Tinn-R 0.0.9.3 r1.15 beta 1 (released 30 Jan 2005)
that stopped working due to expiration of trial period for Delphi
was solved.
•
The first version with the Rparameters completion proposal (Call-
tip):
1.
It was made with a user-expandable database (DBase), that is,
this version does not communicate with Rto guess Rfunction
arguments;
2.
The component used is named TDBF, it is free (open source),
does not use BDE and it is not necessary to have the database
server. The DB engine code is compiled right into the Tinn-
R executable. TDBF is a native data access component for
Delphi, BCB, Kylix and FreePascal. More information can be
found here.
•
A new hotkey (not user-configurable):
CTRL + *
(multiply on the
numeric keypad) inserts/replaces text with parameters of the active
function (a call-tip must be visible).
•
The Application options was reworked. It is now possible to set the
basic application options for RCall-tip.
0.0.9.3 r1.14 (Feb/11/2005)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Some minor bugs were corrected and the buttons appearance
was a little modified.
–
A bug with menu File/Recent files not showing at startup was
fixed.
–
A bug which added the file extension twice was fixed. This bug
was related to full name including the extension, like myfile.r,
where Tinn-R recorded it as myfile.r.r.
–A bug with save was fixed.
–A bug with Pascal files extensions was fixed.
–A bug with shortcut of the menu Edit/Select all was fixed.
•
The problem with Tinn-R 0.0.9.3 r1.14 (released 30 Jan 2005) that
stopped working due to expiration of trial period for Delphi was
solved.
264 WHAT IS NEW?
•
New interface/options for printing,it remembers latest choices/pref-
erences.
•About dialog box was reworked.
• The program user interface was a little reworked.
•
Most of the interactive Rtools do no require any more that files be
saved with a valid S language extension (.r or .q).
• The Rhighlight dictionary was updated:
1. About five hundred words were added;
2.
Fixed a bug with ’_’ in keywords like .decode_package_version.
•
This version was compiled with Delphi 7 (Delphi 5 was used for
previous versions).
•
With Delphi 7, the default dialogs were re-established. So, psvDi-
alogs is not used any more.
•
Menu Format/Block/Uncomment/Firsts occurrence was renamed
to Uncomment First Occurrence.
• Add menu Help/Tinn-R/Changes on Line.
A.14. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2004 (16) 265
A.14 VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2004 (16)
0.0.9.3 r1.14 beta 9 (Dec/04/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Fixed a bug that caused RGUI window to shrink or expand to
a certain size, whenever code was submitted to Rgui in MDI
mode: thanks Steven!
–
Small bug with the function SEND FILE fixed when the file is
set READ ONLY.
•
For a while, it is strongly recommended to set the BACKGROUND
COLOR of ALL SUPPORTED LANGUAGES to WHITE.
•
The defaults Delphi dialogs were replaced by a new, free and good
suite of components calledpsvDialogs written by
Serhiy Perevoznyk
.
Thanks Serhiy! So, the Dialogs are now more pretty.
• Add menu Format/Block/Uncomment first occurrence.
•
Search/Replace was improved with the solution proposed for the
0.0.9.0 r1.09 issue. The user can now work in all windows (even
horizontally or vertically splitted): thanks the Tinn Team.
•
The user can now work in all window (even horizontally or vertically
splitted) for comment/uncomment blocks.
• The syntax selector on file load was reworked.
•
Added C# highlighter instead of that mocked up Java one I had been
using like a fool.
0.0.9.2 r1.14 beta 8 (Oct/2004)
•
Menu R
\
Show and Hide RToolbar was eliminated. This option is
changed to View
\
Toolbars
\
Rwith others toolbars. It is a more logic
place for this option.
•
Menu Editor: line below and top was replaced by Editor: Current
line to top. This improves work alternate with Send: Line to end page
and Editor: Current line to top.
• The send line code was improved.
•
The component SK donated by MJT Net was replaced by the snd-
Keys32.pas written by Ken Henderson and adapted for use in Tinn-R.
This change impacts all send and controlling Rfunction.
266 WHAT IS NEW?
0.0.9.1 r1.14 beta 7 (Oct/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Minor bug with menu R/Controlling R (enabled/disabled) was
corrected.
• Tinn and Tinn-R can now run together.
0.0.9.1 r1.14 beta 6 (Sep/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Minor bugs with general appearance (LikeXP, unlike XP) were
corrected.
•
Marco de Groot (Mattic Software), old Tinn developer, is the new
co-author of the Tinn-R: welcome Marco!
•
Backup and restore were reworked: now the user can choose the
directory.
•
Tinn-R is now more user-friendly to run with R: better Ropen/save
dialogs.
•
Save file interface was reworked: Rfiles (*.r; *.q) is now the primary
option.
•
Open file interface was reworked: the three major file extensions
are now the first one available:
1. Rfiles (*.r; *.q);
2. Text Files (*.txt);
3. All files (*.*).
• Add menu Help/FAQ.
• Delays in large files were corrected: thank you Marco de Groot.
•About was reworked: mails of all authors are now included.
0.0.9.0 r1.14 beta 5 (Sep/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A small bug in resizing the gutter (respect to autoSize and
bookmarks) was corrected.
–
A bug with bracket colors was corrected: it eliminated the
bracket background when the active line highlighting is set to
off.
A.14. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2004 (16) 267
• General stability was improved.
• Appearance was relooked.
0.0.9.0 r1.14 beta 4 (Aug/2004)
• A tooltip was missing in the search in files toolbar button.
•
New tools to save/restore configuration files for Tinn-R are now
added.
0.0.9.0 r1.14 (Aug/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
A bug when Rand a graph device are maximized and the latter
had the focus is now fixed (nothing happened in this case when
sending data from Tinn-R to R).
Note: Tinn-R 0.0.9.0 r1.13 is now frozen and goes through a wider beta test
Tinn-R 0.0.9.0 r1.14 and over are considered development versions; they may
possibly show some instabilities during development.
• Specific Rhotkeys are now automatically activated/deactivated.
• Hotkeys are now permanently set.
• For everyday work, use Tinn-R 0.0.9.0 r1.13
0.0.9.0 r1.13 (Jul/2004)
•
Two new functions were added both to the Rtoolbar and the R
menu: Print content of selected variable and List names of selected
variables. Just experiment with these tools to figure out what they
do (for instance, enter iris in a .R file edited in Tinn-R and try these
two tools while this word is selected).
•
The icon for Help on selected word was changed, and the Send file
icon in the Rtoolbar now has a transparent background.
•
The Rhighlight dictionary was updated (about a hundred words
were added).
0.0.9.0 r1.12 (Jun/2004)
•
Bracket matching is reworked back to a more classical presentation:
match brackets are now presented in bold and in a contrasting color
(i.e., red if symbols are in a different color, or blue if symbols are
colored in red).
268 WHAT IS NEW?
•
The prior content of the clipboard is now preserved in all Send to R
functions.
•
Now the Rconsole is completely cleaned when you use Clear all (pre-
viously, commands to clear the console where left at the command
line).
0.0.9.0 r1.11 (Jun/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Minor bug with match bracket was corrected.
•
On the menu Options/Application options it is now possible to indi-
cate if Rresources are visible or not (switch between plain Tinn and
Tinn-R).
• The menu Tinn to R was renamed R.
•
Menu Tools was reworked. Tools/Initiate or Close preferred Rgui are
now included in the Rmenu.
•Copy Formatted was added to the pop-up menu.
• Behavior of the RToolbar was improved.
•
Automatic match brackets was reworked: current bracket is shown
surrounded by a red rectangle and previous match brackets are
shown surrounded by a background symbol color of the specific
highlighter (user defined). Thus, if the active line is highlighted (Op-
tions/Application options) and the cursor is moved throughout a
line of text with some brackets, it is now possible to identify which
brackets have already been matched during the cursor move.
0.0.9.0 r1.10 (May/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Bugs with Search/Search in files/[x]Search in directories were
corrected.
•
The Window of the results of the Search/Search in files can now be
moved.
•
Project interface was reformulated and pop-up menu is now avail-
able.
A.14. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2004 (16) 269
0.0.9.0 r1.09 (Mar/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–
Minor bugs with ControlBar (on resize for a lesser size that the
ControlBar, close application and start new) and View/Toolbar
(checked/unchecked) menu was corrected.
–
A minor bug (Save/Save as) with associated extensions was
corrected.
–A minor bug with hotkeys was corrected.
–A minor bugs with project was corrected.
–A minor bug with tollbar of macro was corrected.
•
Comment/Uncomment block was reformulated. This now work like
Tinn-R 0.0.9.0.
• Two new hotkeys (not user configurable) were added:
<CTRL + ADD> key (numeric keypad)
will insert/replace text with the attribution symbol '->';
<CTRL + SUBTRACT> key (numeric keypad)
will insert/replace text with the attribution symbol '<-'.
•
Search/Replace was improved. It is possible now to decide if the
occurrence will be, or not, replaced.
Temporarily, and until a better solution is found, to work properly,
if the window is horizontally split the Search/Replace must be made
at the bottom (main) window, because if it's at the top window (secondary)
it doesn't question the confirmation to each substitution of the text occurrence.
If the window is vertically split, the Search/Replace must be made at the
left window (the right window does not question the confirmation to each
substitution of the occurrence). For both, any key will synchronize the split windows.
•
Now Tinn-R can initiate (Tolls/Initiate ...) and close (Tolls/Close
...) preferred RGui. For the first, the path of preferred RGui must be
previously set (Options/Application options).
• A new Tinn to Roption was implemented: Help selected word.
• Interface (appearance and icons) was reformulated.
•
Tinn-R hotkeys’ interface was reformulated. Now it is possible to
choose the desired hotkeys to main actions.
270 WHAT IS NEW?
•
On the menu Options/Application options it is possible to choose
the appearance to Tinn-R like WinXP.
•
Itis possible to get the positions of Tinn-R toolbars (preserved) when
application exits, and restore the next time it is started.
•
On the (Edit/Copy formatted) it is possible to copy the native format
and exported it in RTF, HTML and TeX format.
• Improvements were made to the highlighting.
• Now it is possible to open Projects files with one mouse click.
0.0.8.9 r1.08 (Mar/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Small bug with Comment/Uncomment block was corrected.
•
Now Tinn-R also runs with R, SciViews-R and S-Plus (the last still
not finalized but it is running if the window Commands or S-PLUS -
[Commands]have the focus).
0.0.8.9 r1.07 (Feb/2004)
•
Specific HotKeys (F1..F11) were implemented for all Tinn to Rfunc-
tions. If and while activated, they overlap all the HotKeys of the
Windows and any application running.
•
Tinn-R now generates the two files (Tinn.ini and Shortcuts.ini) on
C:
\
Documents and Settings
\
UserName
\
Application Data (or Dados
de aplicativos)\Tinn\.
• Upgrade Tinn 0.0.8.8 to 0.0.8.9 as changelog.
•
A few tweaks were made in brackets highlighting, as per Marco’s
suggestions.
•
jcfaria suggested a little fix to the File Search window. Russ put it in.
•
jcfaria suggested a change to the RegEx filter interface to check, to
make sure the filter won’t be blank before running it. Russ put that
in.
•
Marco suggested a few changes to the open procedure. Now itchecks
if the file is changed and allows the user to open the file or not.
• fLineWdith has been commented out.
A.14. VERSIONS RELEASED IN 2004 (16) 271
•
Marco also suggested a few changes to the Search In Files code. Russ
put that in, too.
•
Russ pulled out the bitmaps on a few buttons in a few dialogs as per
Marco’s suggestion to keep things unified.
0.0.8.8 r1.06 (Feb/2004)
• Bug(s) fixed:
–Bug =Assertion failure
(c:
\
arquivos de programas
\
borland
\
componentes
\
synedit
\
source
\
SynEditWordWrap.pas,
line149)
Why and when?
if you create a new file and type:
<ENTER>
and press <UP> -> bug!
This was corrected: thank you Marco Groot!
0.0.8.8 r1.05 (Feb/2004)
•
Comment/uncomment block was implemented: default symbol
used for the comment/uncomment must be set in Options/Appli-
cation options.
Comment block : Format/Comment block <ALT+C>.
Uncomment block : Format/Uncomment block <ALT+Z>.
•
Option of Format/Colunm was eliminated: it is better to use this
options (when necessary) keeping ALT pressed. This options are set
in Options/Editor Options/(x)Alt sets column modes.
• ShortCuts to Print and Play macro were set the same =CTRL + P:
F7 : new shortcut to Record Macro
F8 : new shortcut to Play Macro.
APPENDIX B
RMANUALS ON CRAN
The Rcore team creates several manuals for working with R1.
The platform dependent versions of these manuals are part of the respec-
tive Rinstallations. They can be downloaded as PDF files from the URL
given above, or directly browsed as HTML.
http://cran.r-project.org/manuals.html
The following manuals are available:
•
An Introduction to Ris based on the former “Notes on R”, gives an introduction to
the language and how to use R for doing statistical analysis and graphics.
•
A draft of The Rlanguage definition documents the language per se. That is, the
objects that it works on, and the details of the expression evaluation process, which
are useful to know when programming Rfunctions.
•
Writing RExtensions covers how to create your own packages, write Rhelp files, and
the foreign language (C, C++, Fortran, ...) interfaces.
•
R Data Import/Export describes the import and export facilities available either in R
itself or via packages which are available from CRAN.
• R Installation and Administration.
•
R Internals: a guide to the internal structures of Rand coding standards for the core
team working on R itself.
•
The RReference Index: contains all help files of the R standard and recommended
packages in printable form, (approx. 3000 pages).
1
The manuals are created on Debian Linux and may differ from the manuals for Mac or
Windows on platform-specific pages, but most parts will be identical for all platforms.
273
274 R MANUALS ON CRAN
The latex or texinfo sources of the latest version of these documents are
contained in every Rsource distribution. Take a look at the subdirectory
doc/manual of the extracted archive.
The HTML versions of the manuals are also part of most Rinstallations.
They are accessible by using the function help.start().
APPENDIX C
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software
and other kinds of works.
The licenses for mostsoftware and other practical works are designed
to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By con-
trast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change all versions of a program–to make sure
it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foun-
dation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software;
it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You
can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software,we are referring to freedom,not price.
Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you
have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software,
or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same free-
doms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive
or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so
they know their rights.
275
276 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains
that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and
authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously
to authors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
modified versions of the software inside them, although the manu-
facturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim
of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic
pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals
to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore,
we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice
for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other do-
mains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in
future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we
wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free pro-
gram could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL
assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and mod-
ification follow.
Terms and Conditions
0. Definitions.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds
of works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “re-
cipients” may be individuals or organizations.
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the
work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the
making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified
version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work
based on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without
permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for in-
fringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 277
computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copy-
ing, distribution (with or without modification), making available
to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables
other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a
user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not
conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices”
to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If
the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
1. Source Code.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work
for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source
form of a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official
standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case
of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one
that is widely used among developers working in that language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything,
other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal
form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that
Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work
with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface
for which an implementation is available to the public in source
code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major
essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the
specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work
runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code
interpreter used to run it.
The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means
all the source code needed to generate,install,and(foran executable
work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts
to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s
System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available
free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activ-
ities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding
278 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Source includes interface definition files associated with source files
for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynami-
cally linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to
require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow
between those subprograms and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from run-
ning a covered work is covered by this License only if the output,
given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowl-
edges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by
copyright law.
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise re-
mains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole
purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or
provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that
you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all mate-
rial for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or
running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your
behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit
them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside
their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
makes it unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technologi-
cal measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under
article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December
1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to
forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 279
circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License
with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to
limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing,
against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid
circumvention of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as
you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-
permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications
to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under
the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these con-
ditions:
a)
The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modi-
fied it, and giving a relevant date.
b)
The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is re-
leased under this License and any conditions added under
section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in sec-
tion 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
c)
You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this Li-
cense to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This
License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section
7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no
permission to license the work in any other way, but it does
not invalidate such permission if you have separately received
it.
d)
If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has inter-
active interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices,
your work need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and indepen-
dent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered
280 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger
program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is
called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright
are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s
users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a cov-
ered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to
the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-
readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in
one of these ways:
a)
Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by
the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
customarily used for software interchange.
b)
Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long
as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either
(1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software
in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable
physical medium customarily used for software interchange,
for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically
performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
c)
Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of
the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This
alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially,
and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in
accord with subsection 6b.
d)
Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to
the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same
place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to
copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If
the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Cor-
responding Source may be on a different server (operated by
you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities,
provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 281
saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless
of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain
obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to
satisfy these requirements.
e)
Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, pro-
vided you inform other peers where the object code and Cor-
responding Source of the work are being offered to the general
public at no charge under subsection 6d.
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is ex-
cluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need
not be included in conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means
any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal,
family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for
incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product
is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor
of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user,
“normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of
product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way
in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected
to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless
of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or
non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant
mode of use of the product.
“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods,
procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to
install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User
Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The
information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning
of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered
with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with,
or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs
as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use
of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or
for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized),
the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be
accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement
does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability
to install modified object code on the User Product (for example,
the work has been installed in ROM).
282 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not in-
clude a requirement to continue to provide support service, war-
ranty,or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the
recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or
installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification
itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network
or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the
network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information pro-
vided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
documented (and with an implementation available to the public
in source code form), and must require no special password or key
for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
“Additionalpermissions” are terms that supplementthe terms of this
License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program
shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to
the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional
permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be
used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program
remains governed by this License without regard to the additional
permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part
of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place
additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material
you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright
holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with
terms:
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b)
Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices
or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate
Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
c)
Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
requiring that modified versions of such material be marked
in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 283
d)
Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors
or authors of the material; or
e)
Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f)
Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified
versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the
recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions
directly impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further
restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you
received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is gov-
erned by this License along with a term that is a further restriction,
you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further
restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License,
you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of
that license document, provided that the further restriction does
not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional
terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find
the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in
the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the
above requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license
from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, un-
less and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates
your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to
notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60
days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is rein-
stated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the vi-
olation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
284 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not
permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses
for the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run
a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work oc-
curring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However,
nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate
or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you
do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating
a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do
so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an
organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered
work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transac-
tion who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses
to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give
under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Cor-
responding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you
may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
11. Patents.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 285
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
License of the Program ora workon which the Program is based. The
work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.
A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned
or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or here-
after acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a con-
sequence of further modification of the contributor version. For
purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant
patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-
free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims,
to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify
and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express
agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce
a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or
covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a
patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or com-
mitment not to enforce a patent against the party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for any-
one to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License,
through a publicly available network server or other readily accessi-
ble means, then you must either(1) cause the Corresponding Source
to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit
of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a
manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend
the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying”
means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license,
your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s
use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more
identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe
are valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrange-
ment, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a cov-
ered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving
the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or con-
vey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you
286 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work
and works based on it.
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the
scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on
the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically
granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if
you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the
business of distributing software,under which you make payment to
the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the
work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties
who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies),or(b) primarily
for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agree-
ment or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License,
they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations,
then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if
you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further
conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only
way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be
to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have per-
mission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a
single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms
of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered
work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public
License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will
apply to the combination as such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 287
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such
new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Pro-
gram specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the op-
tion of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foun-
dation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU
General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future ver-
sions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s
public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes
you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permis-
sions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any au-
thor or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later
version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFEC-
TIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUD-
ING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
288 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OP-
ERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER
OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, re-
viewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Pro-
gram, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
copy of the Program in return for a fee.
End of Terms and Conditions
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make
it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under
these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <textyear> <name of author>
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 289
<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type `show c'for details.
The hypothetical commands
show w
and
show c
should show the
appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your
program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you
would use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer)
or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program,
if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and
follow the GNU GPL, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your
program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking propri-
etary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do,
use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
But first, please read
http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-
lgpl.html.
INDEX
.trPaths?, 34
about, 147
application options, 48
editor, 49
editor advanced, 49
editor encoding, 50
editor EOL, 50
editor keystrokes, 50
main, 48
processing, 53
processing conversion, 53
processing LaTeX, 54
R, 53
bookmarks, 41
bug report, 33
color preferences, 44
column mode, 41
completion, 76
comunication, 45,46
configuration, 10
copy and paste, 42
Ctrl+Shift+0, 46
databases, 88
card (R), 90
comments, 89
completion, 88
mirrors (R), 91
shortcuts, 88
debugging, 15
default editor, 37
defining hotkeys, 41
Deplate, 17
discussion group, 147
edit menu, 106
copy formatted, 106
Emacs, 37
encoding, 108
ANSI, 108
UTF-8, 108
UTF16-BE, 108
UTF16-LE, 108
EOL, 109
MAC (CR), 109
UNIX (LF), 109
WIN (CR+LF), 109
FAQ, 33
.trPaths?, 34
bookmarks, 41
bug report, 33
color preferences, 44
column mode, 41
comunication, 45,46
copy and paste, 42
Ctrl+Shift+0, 46
default editor, 37
defining hotkeys, 41
Emacs, 37
feedback, 33
find errors in my script, 45
focus control, 43
freeze, 45
graphical debugger, 42
291
292 INDEX
gutter, 42
hotkeys, 40
icon on Windows, 43
install, 34
knit, 46
knitr, 46
latest version, 33
marked blocks, 45
marks, 46
reuse my preferences, 35
save my preferences, 35
shortcut for cycling, 41
source code, 35
starting GUI, 37
step-by-step, 42
suggestions, 33
Tinn-R and Rgui, 45
Tinn-R and Rterm, 46
Tinn-R installation, 33
tools panel, 42
triggers, 38
What is Tinn-R?, 33
WinEdt, 37
feedback, 33
file menu, 102
copy to clipboard, 103
template, 102
filetabs, 81
find, 84
find and replace, 84
find errors in my script, 45
focus control, 43
format menu, 107
encoding, 108
eol, 108
selection, 107
UTF-8, 109
word, 107
freeze, 45,46
graphical debugger, 42
gutter, 42
help menu, 147
main file conversion, 147
highlighters
color, 59
multi-highlighters, 59
hotkeys, 40,62
icon on Windows, 43
ini file, 147
insert menu, 111
LaTeX, 111
LaTeX font, 114
LaTeX format, 113
LaTeX header, 113
LaTeX math, 111
R, 111
install, 34
installation, 10
sourceforge, 39
inverse DVI search, 15
IO Interface, 65
keyboard shortcuts, 21
alphabetical list, 28
ALT Keys, 28
call tip, 28
code completion, 28
compilation, 24
conversion, 24
CTRL keys, 30
DEL key, 31
edit, 25
edition, 23
END key, 31
file menu, 25
format, 26
function +1:12, 31
function keys, 22
HOME key, 31
insert, 26
main menu, 25
marks, 23,26
navigation, 22
options, 26
project, 23,25
INDEX 293
R explorer, 28
R interface, 21
R menu, 27
R script edition, 23
search, 26
search/replace and go, 22
selection, 24
SHIFT keys, 32
tools, 27
view, 27
vizualization, 21
keywords
all, 21–27,29–32
any, 21
break, 23
browser, 24,27,32
by, 23
C, 23–26,28,30,32
comment, 23,25,28
D, 24,25,27,28,32
default, 24,27,32
environment, 28
example, 21
file, 21,23–27,31,32
help, 21,32
I, 23–28,32
index, 24,27
mode, 24,32
numeric, 23,26,30,32
objects, 22,31
off, 21,26,28
on, 21,22,26,28,31
optimize, 21,27
or, 23,26,28,30–32
page, 21,32
R, 21–23,25–28,31,32
replace, 23,30
seq, 21,32
set, 21,24,27,28,32
show, 21,27,28
single, 24,27
structure, 22,31
system, 24,27,32
text, 21,26,32
Knitr, 131
latest version, 33
LOG Interface, 67
marked blocks, 45
marks, 46
marks menu, 110
block, 110
markup, 70
metacharacters, 95
alternatives, 97
backreferences, 98
find examples, 98
iterators, 96
line separators, 95
predefined classes, 95
subexpressions, 97
word boundaries, 96
Miktex, 15
options menu, 116
default, 118
syntax, 116
syntax set, 117
overview, 1
bug reports, 6
quick start, 2
what do you get?, 4
what is Tinn-R?, 2
why Tinn-R?, 3
Pandoc, 18
processing, 160
DVI, 160
PDF, 160
project, 69
project menu, 104
file, 105
group, 105
project, 104
Python, 19
R
card, 78,90
294 INDEX
explorer, 77
mirror, 91,167
mirrors, 79,167
set mirror, 167
R menu, 126
close, 126
connections, 126
control, 132
control packages, 133
Rterm, 127
Rterm clear, 128
Rterm file, 127
Rterm file IO, 127
Rterm file lOG, 128
Rterm focus, 128
Rterm fontsize, 130
Rterm highlighter, 129
Rterm highlighter IO, 129
Rterm highlighter LOG, 129
Rterm history, 130
Rterm line wrap, 130
Rterm size, 128
Rterm split, 129
Rterm workspace, 130
send, 131
start, 126
recognized words, 147
regular expressions, 93
character classes, 94
escape sequences, 93
simple matches, 93
replace, 84
reuse my preferences, 35
Rgui, 14
Rterm, 14
interface, 64
IO, 65
LOG, 67
Ruby, 17
Rfunctions
help.start, 274
Rpackages
Hmisc, 204
save my preferences, 35
search
case sensitivity, 86
in files, 86
regular expressions, 86
results, 87
search menu, 115
secrets, 149
active page, 174
after installation, 151
appearance, 156
arrange, 174
auto completion, 174
bars, 170
card (R), 167
colors preference, 162
database, 164
completion, 164
shortcuts, 164
dock, 157
editor options, 158
Editor: how to?, 173
general, 156
highlighters preference, 162
I’m panicking, 155
introduction, 150
macros, 173
marks, 173
project, 163
R, 159,166
explorer, 166
spell checker, 171
split, 172
tab order, 174
tools, 163
visibility, 154
selection mode, 56
column, 57
line, 57
normal, 56
selection mode menu, 118
shortcut for cycling, 41
shortcuts, 61
customization, 61
INDEX 295
source code, 35
speller, 15
starting GUI, 37
step-by-step, 42
suggestions, 33
SynEdit, 64
template
R doc, 103
R html, 102
R markdown, 102
R noweb, 102
R script, 102
Tinn-R and Rgui, 45
Tinn-R and Rterm, 46
Tinn-R installation, 33
tools, 68
backup, 124
database, 124
interface, 68
macro, 124
markup, 70
markup L
A
T
EX, 70
markup txt2tags, 70
misc, 68
project, 69
restore, 124
results, 71
results inilog, 71
sort, 125
Windows expl., 68
Work expl., 69
tools interface
card (R), 78
Comments, 76
completion, 75
database, 73
hex, 71
mirrors (R), 79
R, 77
R explorer, 77
search, 71
shortcuts, 73
spell, 72
tools menu, 119
compilation, 122
conversion deplate, 120
processing, 119,120
processing Txt2tags, 122
processing viewer, 123
processing viewer dvi, 123
processing viewer html, 123
processing viewer pdf, 123
tools panel, 42
toolsbar, 82
disposition, 82
showhide, 82
triggers, 38
Txt2tags, 19
user guide, 147
user list, 147
view menu, 134
Line wrap, 140
fontsize, 141
R, 134
Rterm, 135
Rterm highlighter, 136
Rterm highlighter IO, 136
Rterm highlighter LOG, 136
Rterm line wrap, 136
Rterm size, 135
Rterm split, 135
split, 141
tabs, 139
tabs files, 140
tabs Rterm, 140
tabs tools, 140
toolbars, 139
tools, 137
tools resources, 137
tools resources database,138
tools resources markup, 138
tools resources misc, 138
tools resources R, 139
tools resources results, 138
tools size, 137
296 INDEX
web menu, 143
processing, 146
R Editors, 144
R GUIs, 144
R IDEs, 144
R information, 144
R search, 143
R search selected, 143
statistics, 145
statistics virtual labs, 145
Tinn-R, 145
What is New?, 177
2004, 265
2005, 249
2006, 227
2007, 219
2008, 210
2009, 203
2010, 200
2012, 197
2013, 192
2014, 189
2015, 186
2016, 182
2018, 180
2019, 178
What is Tinn-R?, 33
windows menu, 142
WinEdt, 37
ABOUT THE AUTHORS
Faria, José Cláudio
teaches statistics at Universidade Estadual de Santa
Cruz - UESC
(Santa Cruz State University), Bahia/Brazil.
He is head of the Laboratory of Computational Statistics - LEC.
Grosjean, Philippe
teaches biostatistics and aquatic ecology at Mons Uni-
versity, UMONS, Belgium.
He is head of the Laboratory of Numerical Ecology of Aquatic Systems at
UMONS.
Jelihovschi, Enio Galinkin
teaches statistics at Universidade Estadual de
Santa Cruz - UESC
(Santa Cruz State University), Bahia/Brazil.
Pietrobon, Ricardo
is Associate Vice Chair and Associate Professor, De-
partment of Surgery, Research on Research Group, Duke University Medi-
cal Center.
Farias, Philipe Silva
is a Computer Science student at Universidade Es-
tadual de Santa Cruz - UESC
(Santa Cruz State University), Bahia/Brazil.
Kramer, Philiphe Alexandre Ribeiro
is a Computer Science student at
Universidade Estadual de Santa Cruz - UESC
(Santa Cruz State University), Bahia/Brazil.
Lima, Swami de Paula
is a Computer Science student at Universidade
Estadual de Santa Cruz - UESC
(Santa Cruz State University), Bahia/Brazil.
297

Navigation menu